BMW 730d, 730i, 730ld, 730li, 745d, 760Li, 760i Owner's Handbook Manual
BMW 760Li is a high-performance vehicle that offers a variety of advanced features and capabilities. With its powerful engine and sleek design, the BMW 760Li is perfect for those who demand the best in driving performance. Some of the key features of the BMW 760Li.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
730i
730Li
740i
740Li
750i
750Li
760i
760Li
730d
730Ld
745d
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will discover driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW. It contains important notes on how to operate the car, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. It also contains useful information which will help you to uphold both the car's operating safety and its full resale value.
Supplementary information is provided in other documents of on-board literature.
We wish you many a safe and enjoyable journey,
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 013 197
English II/07, 07 03 450
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Contents
The quickest access to a particular topic or item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index, see page
About this Owner's Handbook
Notes
Overview
Driving area
iDrive
Voice input system
Controls
Opening and closing
Adjusting
Carrying children in safety
Driving
Everything under control
Technical features for driving comfort and safety
Lights
Climate
Practical interior equipment
Driving hints
Driving precautions
Navigation
Starting the navigation system
Destination input
Route guidance
What to do if ...
Entertainment
On/off and settings
Radio
CD player
CD changer
MD player
External audio device
Television TV
DVD changer
Communication
Overview of the telephone
Initial operation
Telephoning
TeleService, BMW Assist
BMW Online
Mobility
Refuelling
Wheels and tyres
In the engine compartment
Maintenance
Replacing parts
Mutual aid
Reference
Technical data
Short commands for the voice input system
From A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Notes
About this Owner's
Handbook
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest access to a particular topic or item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index at the end.
Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of your car.
When the time comes to sell your BMW, please remember to hand over this Owner's Handbook; it is an important part of the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
If you have any queries, BMW Service will be glad to advise you.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmw.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
<
Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.
<
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
<
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Identifies optional extras or specific nationalmarket items of equipment, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies texts on the control display for selecting functions.
Identifies inputs made via the voice input system.
{ ...
} Identifies commands for the voice input system.
{{ ...
}} Identifies replies by the voice input system.
Symbol for components and assemblies
Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner's Handbook in connection with a particular part or assembly.
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Your individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Handbook describes all models and equipment specifications which BMW offers within this particular model line.
This explains why the Owner's Handbook may also contain details of items which you have not ordered. The differences can easily be identified by the asterisk * shown against optional extras.
If your BMW contains equipment that is not described in this Owner's Handbook, Supplementary Owner's Handbooks will be supplied and you are requested to study and comply with them.
On cars with right-hand drive, some of the controls are arranged differently from those shown in the pictures of this Owner's
Handbook.
<
Status at time of printing
The high safety and quality standards of BMW vehicles are maintained by unceasing development work on designs, equipment and accessories. In rare instances, your car may therefore differ from the information supplied in this
Owner's Handbook.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
The advanced technology behind this car, for example the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, means that specially adapted methods of maintenance and repair are required. Always have the necessary work on your BMW performed either by BMW
Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.
<
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends using parts and accessory products on this vehicle that are specifically approved for this purpose by
BMW.
You are recommended to consult BMW Service for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accessories, other BMW-approved products and competent advice on all related matters.
The safety and compatibility of these parts and products in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts product liability for them.
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or accessory products of any kind which it has not approved.
BMW is unable to assess each individual product of outside origin as to its suitability for use on BMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can suitability be assured if an official permit has been issued for it in a specific country. Tests performed for such permits cannot always cover all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are insufficient.
<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This summary of buttons, switches and displays serves as an initial guide.
It in addition gives you an insight into the principles behind the various ways in which functions can be performed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving area
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Roller sun blind for rear window
2 Safety switch for rear windows
3 Electric windows
4
5 Parking brake
6 Side lights
Low-beam headlights
Daytime driving lights *
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
7
8
Automatic driving lights control
Daytime driving lights *
Adaptive Head Light *
High-beam headlights assistant *
Instrument lighting
BMW Night Vision *
Sport program and manual mode of automatic transmission
Changing TV channel
Skipping chapter *
Programmable button
9 Steptronic: upshift
10 Steptronic: downshift
11 Flashing turn indicators
High-beam headlights/headlight
High-beam headlights assistant *
Parking lights
Computer
Check Control
Computer
13 Info display
14 Automatic transmission
15 Ignition lock
16 Switching the ignition on/off
and starting/stopping the engine
17
18
Rain sensor
Park Distance Control PDC
12 Buttons on the steering wheel
Activating/deactivating voice input system
Raising/lowering volume of entertainment equipment
Raising/lowering volume of handsfree unit
Mobile phone * :
Making a call, redialling, accepting
19 Horn, entire surface
20 Heated steering wheel *
Steering wheel adjustment
21
22
Opening luggage compartment lid
Programmable cruise control 64
Active Cruise Control *
23
Front fog lights *
Rear fog lights *
24
Releasing the engine compartment lid 223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
9
Info display
1
Zeroing trip distance recorder 72
2 Speedometer with display for
> Programmable cruise control
> Active Cruise Control
> Speed limit
3
Indicator and warning lights 11
4 Revolution counter
Route guidance by navigation system *
5 High-beam headlights assistant
6
7 Display for
> Voice input system *
> Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorder
>
Text message in Check Control 77
> Computer
8 Transmission positions
9
Automatic transmission program 60
10 Display for
>
> Clock
>
Indicator and warning lights 77
11 Display for
> Computer with fuel gauge
> Remaining distance for service
12 Fog lights
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Indicator and warning lights
The principle
Indicator and warning lights may light up in a variety of combinations and colours.
Some lights in the panel are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine starts or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Indicator lights without text message
The following indicator lights indicate that certain functions are active:
With parking brake released
Front fog lights
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
High-beam headlights/
High-beam headlights assistant *
Rear fog lights
Dynamic Stability Control DSC, flashing
Text messages on the info display illustrate the importance of displayed indicator and warning lights.
You can call up further information, e.g. on the cause of a fault and on what action is required,
via the Check Control, see page 77
.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Comfort/convenience: controls and displays
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
1 Glass roof, electric
2 Memory buttons for integrated universal remote control *
3
4 Interior light
5 Making an emergency call *
6 Control display
7 Temperature for left-hand side of interior compartment: turn,
maximum cooling output: press 100 ,
8 Air volume, left-hand side of interior compartment or entire interior compartment * : turn
Defrosting windows and removing mist * :
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Air volume, right-hand side of interior compartment
11 Temperature for right-hand side of interior compartment: turn, using of residual
12 Heated rear window
13 Air conditioning operation
14 Opening the glove box
15 Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features * : automatic air distribution and supply as well as intensity of the
AUTO program, right-hand side of interior compartment
Automatic air conditioning: switching off
16 Starting the search
>
>
17 Central locking system
18 Selecting frequency range AM or FM
19 Selecting radio, CD player/MD player and
CD changer
20
21 button and programmable button
22 Snap-in adapter
23
Heated seats *
Active seat ventilation
Active seat
Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory *
24
25
26 Switching audio and video sources on/off
27 Storage compartment or telephone keypad, retractable *
28 Automatic air distribution and supply as well as intensity of the AUTO program, left-hand side of interior compartment or entire interior compartment
29 Ambient air/Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC/recirculated air
30 Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features * : switching off, see
Switching automatic air conditioning on and off
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. These functions can now be controlled from one central point. The following introduction illustrates how easy the iDrive is to use. Details of how to control individual functions are provided under the descriptions of the items of equipment concerned.
Controls
1 Control display
2 Programmable button
3 button
To call up the start menu
4 Controller
You can select menu items and adjust settings with the controller:
> Move it in eight directions, arrows 5
> Turn it, arrow 6
> Press it, arrow 7
Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as not to endanger the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.
<
Switching control display on/off
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Press the controller.
Press the controller to switch on.
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Menus on the control display
You can select a wide range of functions or make a wide range of adjustments:
1 BMW Assist *
> TeleService * , BMW Assist
> BMW Online *
2 Communication *
> Telephoning
3 On-board data
> Computer
>
> Speed limit
> Stopwatch
> Assistance window * for on-board
> Engine oil level
>
>
4 Navigation
>
> Route guidance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5 Help
> Displaying short help texts *
> Menu name for menu change *
6 Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player *
> CD changer *
> MD player
>
> Television TV
> DVD changer
7 Settings
> Parking brake
> Park Distance Control PDC
> Electronic Damping Control EDC
> Programmable buttons
> Run Flat Indicator RPA
> Date and time
>
> Units of measurement and form of
>
> Rear screen
> Logging mobile phone onto the vehicle
8 Climate
>
Intensity of the AUTO program 98 ,
> Air volume
> Heated seats *
> Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater *
>
Extra, e.g. rear air conditioning 107
Operating principle
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via eight menu items.
Calling up start menu
Press the button.
To call up the start menu from a menu:
> Move the controller in the direction of the currently active menu.
> Move the controller twice in one direction.
Selecting a menu
You can call up eight menu items via the start menu by moving the controller in the corresponding direction.
In one menu you can directly change to a new menu without initially calling up the start menu by moving in the corresponding direction.
By moving in the corresponding direction of the last used menu you change to the last setting of this menu.
<
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Selecting a menu item
To edit a function, select the corresponding menu item. Menu items in white can be selected by marking them.
Displaying/hiding the menu name
When changing to a new menu, you can have the name of the new menu displayed briefly.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Help".
3.
Select "Menu name" and press the controller.
Turn the controller.
The marker moves.
To change to the left and right side of the control display between the menu items, turn the controller further to the beginning or end of a list. The marker changes to the other side of the control display.
Activating a menu item
Press the controller.
Symbol as display of the menus switched on. The menu name is displayed.
Adjusting settings
Symbols
Several functions and information are illustrated in form of symbols:
The function is switched on.
Back.
The function is switched on.
"Split": transfer the current display to the assistance window.
1.
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
2.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Status lines
1 Hands-free function active
2 Missed call
3 Reception strength of mobile phone network *
4 This indicates:
> The name of the mobile phone logged on
> The number entered/dialled
5 Phone status:
> Green, yellow and red flashing:
Pairing a mobile phone
> Green:
Incoming or outgoing call
> Red:
No network
> Yellow:
Roaming * active, you are using a different supplier's network
6 Display for traffic information * :
> "TMC":
Traffic information for the navigation system can be received and its transmission has been activated
> "VI+":
Traffic information from Traffic
Information Plus can be received and its transmission has been activated
7
Check Control message pending 77
You can call up additional information on the control display subsequently by selecting "CHECK" in the "On-board data"
Service requirements status 76
Red:
At least one service appointment is overdue. You can call up further information on the extent of maintenance work required via the "On-board data" menu under
8 Temperature selection and intensity of the
AUTO program, right-hand side of interior compartment *
9 Air volume, right-hand side of interior compartment *
10 Display for traffic reports * :
> "TP":
Traffic reports are switched on.
> "T":
Traffic reports are switched off, the selected radio station broadcasts traffic reports.
> No display:
Traffic reports are switched off, the selected radio station does not broadcast traffic reports.
11 Entertainment
Display for radio, CD, MD, TV and DVD
With compressed audio files, the information about the track is displayed
12 Air volume, entire interior compartment or left-hand side of interior compartment *
13 Temperature selection and intensity of the
AUTO program, entire interior compartment or left-hand side of interior compartment *
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Assistance window*
Status lines
The assistance window displays additional information:
> Brief help texts and supplementary information on the selected menu items.
> A function selected in the menu "On-board data", see page
> The route for vehicles with a navigation sys-
.
Displaying/hiding help texts
You can have help texts and supplementary information on the selected menu items displayed in the assistance window.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Help".
3.
Select "Help texts" and press the controller.
1 Outside temperature or destination for navigation
2 Time
3 Date
Rear screen*
Some functions of iDrive can be operated also via the rear screen. Certain functions are only available via iDrive. These functions can only be operated subject to restrictions from the rear screen, for instance the speed limit can only be called up. The setting is performed via iDrive.
on.
Symbol as display of the menus switched
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Folding open the screen
1.
Fold arm upwards until it engages.
2.
Fold up the rear screen.
The rear screen is operational.
Folding down the screen
1.
Position the rear screen straight.
2.
Fold down the rear screen until the folding arm is released.
Folding arm pivots downwards.
The rear screen is switched off.
Pivot the rear screen down if the ski bag is in use, otherwise it could be damaged.
Do not pivot the rear screen up or down if the drinks holders are open, otherwise it could be damaged.
<
Switching off rear screen
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Press the controller.
Press the controller to switch on.
Controller/buttons
The controller and buttons are located on the centre armrest.
Rear lock
The available functions are operated via the corresponding controller.
You can restrict use at the rear via iDrive or switch off the rear screen.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Rear" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Release" and press several times until the desired rear screen setting is enabled.
> "menu"
You can switch the offered menus on or off individually by turning and pressing the controller.
Symbol as display of switched-on menus.
> "None"
You switch off the rear screen.
> "Full"
You reset all blocked features.
> "Limited"
You block the functions used on the front control display.
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Headphones
1 Headphones socket
2 Adjusting volume
3 Station/track search
> Station search
> Music track search for CD and MD, chapter search for DVD changer
> Channel selection for TV
When headphones are plugged in, separate channels are used for the sound output for the control display and the rear screen.
This means e.g. that the driver can listen to the radio while a rear passenger is playing a DVD.
<
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Voice input system *
The principle
The voice input system enables you to operate various items of equipment on your car without having to take your hands off the steering wheel. You do this by means of spoken commands that you will easily pick up once you have used them a few times. In many cases, you are assisted by means of announcements or questions by the voice input system while making your inputs.
The voice input system converts your commands and dialogues into control signals for the system in question.
Please familiarise yourself with the operating principle for each item of equipment before attempting to operate it via the voice input system. At the time of going to print, the voice input system was available in a choice of
German, English, Italian, French and Spanish.
Other languages are in preparation.
<
Note
Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice input system is operating so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the
language for iDrive, see page 81 .
Symbols used
Identifies inputs made via the voice input system.
{ ...
} Identifies commands for the voice input system.
{{ ...
}} Identifies replies by the voice input system.
Voice-operated equipment
> { Navigation } , see page
> { Radio } , see page
> { Telephone } , see page
> { CD } , see page
> { CD changer }
> { MiniDisc } , see page
> { Notepad } , see page
> { TV } , see page
> { DVD } , see page
The info display, see page 23 , shows the item of equipment that you are currently operating, or an error message relating to it.
Speaking commands
Activating the voice input system
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
An acoustic signal is given and the display
"SVS active" appears on the info display, see page 23 , to indicate that the system is now operational. You automatically start in the main menu.
From here, you can call up all equipment that can be operated by voice input.
Interrupting voice input
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or
{ Cancel } .
It is only possible to interrupt dialogues, in which it is possible to speak a text of your choice, such as names or notes, by pressing the button.
If you receive a telephone call while making a voice input, telephone mode will cut in automatically. The info display shows
"SVS active", see page 23 .
<
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Spoken commands
The voice input system understands predefined commands, which need to be given exactly, word for word. You can have the available commands read out to you at any point. To do this, give the command { Options } .
In addition to the commands described, there are often other commands that can be used to prompt the same function. For instance, instead of { Options } you can also say { What now } . Also detailed possibilities, such as { Scale
100 metres } instead of { Scale } , are often possible.
Representation in the Owner's
Handbook
There are special commands for each item of equipment. In this Owner's Handbook, the commands are listed as part of the description of each equipment item.
This pictogram denotes the instructions for operation via the voice input system.
Displays on the info display
Short commands
Within the { Main menu } level, you can carry out certain functions directly by means of short
, without having to call up the specific equipment item in question first.
For instance, if you wish to dial a telephone number, you can directly say
1.
{ Dial number } .
2.
Enter the number.
without first saying
{ Telephone } .
Line 1 of the info display shows you which spoken command or question is active, and line 2 shows what the voice input system has understood.
Any error messages are also displayed.
Changing map scale for navigation: an example
Starting the dialogue
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
You say
{ Change scale }
{ Scale 100 metres }
The voice input system replies
{{ Please enter the desired scale }}
Display on the info display
"SVS active"
"Scale?
Change scale"
"OK
100 m"
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting volume
You can adjust the volume for announcements by the voice input system:
> Avoid causing background noise in the car while you are speaking, and ask your passengers not to talk while you are issuing voice commands.
> The hands-free microphone is positioned to pick up the driver's voice. Other occupants of the car could therefore be understood with less accuracy.
Turn the knob during an announcement until the desired volume is obtained.
This volume is retained for voice input system announcements even if you set other audio sources to minimum values.
The setting of the volume is stored for the currently used remote control.
Notes
Do not use the voice input system for emergency calls. Your voice and habitual tone could be affected by stressful situations, as a result of which the process of establishing the telephone connection could be unnecessarily delayed. Instead, use the emergency call
button near the inside mirror, see page 235
.
<
Operating conditions
The voice input system uses a special handsfree microphone located in the roof lining, towards the front of your car. Although background noises are filtered out, please observe the following points to make sure that the system understands you accurately:
> Speak continuously and at normal volume.
Avoid unnatural emphasis and pauses between words.
> Do not speak while the voice input system itself is giving an output.
> Keep doors, windows and the glass roof closed to avoid noise interference from outside the car.
The notepad
Recording a note
{ Record note } .
You can record spoken text for a total of approx.
10 minutes, either as individual passages or continuously.
Ending recording:
Press and hold down the button.
When recording notes, the voice input system is programmed to ignore the commands { Cancel } and { Exit } . In this case, the function which identifies the command words is deactivated to enable you to use a free choice of vocabulary in your notes. In other words, command words do not have to be avoided.
<
Listening to notes
To listen to previously recorded notes:
1.
{ Read out note } .
Approximately the first 3 seconds of the first note are read out.
2.
After the query {{ Record note, read out note, delete notepad.
}} select the desired function.
> To have the entire note read out:
{ Read out } .
> To listen to the next note:
{ Next } .
> To listen to the note again:
{ Back } or { Repeat } .
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Deleting notes
1.
{ Edit note } .
2.
{ Delete } .
Clearing the notepad
To clear the entire notepad:
1.
{ Notepad } .
2.
{ Delete } .
Standard commands
The standard commands are valid for all equipment items.
The system is set to { Standard dialog } upon delivery, to make it easier for you to familiarise yourself with the voice input system.
<
Function
Repeating the last announcement by the voice input system
Closing the voice input system
Adjusting detailed announcements and error messages
Adjusting brief announcements and error messages
Calling up information on individual equipment items
Listing the possible commands for the item of equipment that has been called up. This list is displayed simultaneously on the info display, see page 23
Calling up main menu
Command
{ Repeat }
{ Cancel }
{ Standard dialog }
{ Short dialog }
{ Help }
{ Options }
{ Main menu }
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This chapter enables you to operate your car with greater ease. All equipment items that are of relevance for driving and making your journey safer and more comfortable are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Remote control/keys
Integrated key
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in toolkit, see page
Remote control with integrated key
Every remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice annually in order to keep the battery charged. If your car is fitted with convenient access * , the remote control will feature a replaceable battery, see page
On the basis of the remote control detected when unlocking the car, various settings will be
called up in the car and implemented, see Key
.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, see Condition Based Service CBS, page 227
.
Press button 1 to release the key.
You can unlock and lock the following items with the integrated key:
> The storage compartment beneath the front armrest
> The driver's door
> The luggage compartment lid
The switch for locking the luggage compartment lid separately is located in this storage compartment, see page
.
If you now lock the storage compartment
beneath the front armrest, see page 116
, and hand over only the remote control without the key, it will not be possible to gain access to the luggage compartment via the lid. This is an advantage, for example, at hotels.
New remote controls
New remote controls, whether additional ones or replacements, are available from BMW Service.
Spare key
Spare key, to be kept in a safe place, for instance in a purse or wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key fit the same locks.
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is needed to start the car with the spare key or to switch on the ignition.
Take the adapter from the toolkit, see
.
Press safety button 1 to release, slide open the cover and place the spare key 2 in the adapter.
Close the cover and insert the adapter in the ignition lock.
> Air distribution, temperature and intensity for automatic air conditioning, see
> Settings shown on the control display:
> Units of measurement for fuel consumption, distance, temperature and pressure, see page
> Language on the control display, see
.
> Display form of date and time, see
.
> Brightness of the control display, see
.
> Personal settings for volume and tone of sound output for entertainment systems, see page
> Personal setting for memorised radio stations, see page
.
> Personal setting of volume for hands-free
.
Key Memory
The principle
You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Key Memory ensures that most of these settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for that purpose is recognised and the settings saved for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your personal settings are active when you return to your BMW, even if the car was used in the interim by someone else with a remote control of their own and the settings were changed accordingly. Individual settings are saved for up to four remote controls.
Key Memory
> Personal temperature distribution for heated seat * , see page
.
> Personal setting for programmable button on the steering wheel, see page
.
> Personal setting for Park Distance Control
PDC *
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Central locking system
The principle
The central locking becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The following are unlocked or locked in combination:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler flap
The central locking system can be operated from outside:
> Via the remote control
> Via the driver's door lock
> With convenient access * via door handle and from the inside via the central locking button.
When operated from outside, the deadlocks are engaged at the same time. This prevents the doors from being unlocked either at the safety lock buttons or door handles. The alarm system * is also armed or disarmed. The interior light is in addition switched on and off with the remote control.
For further details of the alarm system * , see page
In the event of an accident of sufficient severity, the central locking is released automatically.
The hazard warning flashers and the interior light are in addition switched on.
Opening and closing: from outside
With the remote control
Persons remaining in the car or pets left inside can lock the doors from the inside.
You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the car can be opened from the outside.
<
1 Unlocking, convenient opening and disarming alarm system
2 Locking and deadlocking, convenient closing, arming alarm system, switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector, switching on interior light and the doors' ground lights
3 Opening luggage compartment lid
4 Switching on interior light and headlight courtesy delay feature, activating panic mode * . For details on headlight courtesy delay feature, see page
If the car cannot be locked with the remote control, the battery in the remote control is flat. Use this remote control for a longer journey so that the battery is recharged, see page
.
In the event of fault please approach your BMW
Service, where spare keys can be obtained.
<
Unlocking
Press the button. The hazard warning flashers flash twice.
The interior light and the doors' ground lights come on.
On some national-market versions, press the button twice, the first time to unlock the driver's door and fuel filler flap, and the second time to unlock the entire vehicle.
<
Convenient opening
Press and hold down the button. The windows and the glass roof are opened.
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Locking
Press the flashers flash once.
button. The hazard warning
Do not lock the car from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it can then not be unlocked from the inside on certain national-market versions.
<
Convenient closing
Press and hold down the button. The windows and the glass roof are closed.
Watch the closing movement to ensure that no-one is trapped. The closing procedure is interrupted if the button is released.
<
Switching on the interior light and ground lights
With the car locked, press the button.
Switching on the interior light
Press the button.
This function enables you to locate the car, for instance in a parking garage.
Panic mode*
You can activate the alarm system in the event of danger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
To switch the alarm off: press any button.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. one second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened if the car has first been unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings rearwards and upwards when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
To avoid locking yourself out of the car inadvertently, never put the remote control down inside the luggage compartment. If the luggage compartment lid was previously locked, it will be locked again as soon as it is closed.
<
Automatic luggage compartment lid actuation*
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. one second.
The luggage compartment lid opens completely, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened if the car has first been unlocked.
<
Interrupting the opening movement:
Press the button again during the opening movement.
The luggage compartment lid swings rearwards and upwards when opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
To avoid locking yourself out of the car inadvertently, never put the remote control down inside the luggage compartment. If the luggage compartment lid was previously locked, it will be locked again as soon as it is closed.
<
Closing the luggage compartment lid
Press and hold down the button.
The movement is stopped when the button is released.
To avoid injuries, make sure that the closing area of the luggage compartment lid is unobstructed.
<
Malfunction
The remote control may malfunction as a result of interference from localised radio signals.
If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with a key.
If the car cannot be locked with a remote control, the battery in the key is flat. Use this remote control when driving a relatively long distance
to recharge its battery, see page 28
.
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Via the door lock
Opening and closing: from inside
Do not lock the car from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it can then not be unlocked from the inside on certain national-market versions.
<
The car is unlocked according to the setting memorised.
In some national versions, the alarm system * is triggered when the door lock is unlocked.
To switch off the alarm:
Unlock the car with the remote control, see page
30 , or insert the remote control fully into
the ignition lock.
<
For further details of the alarm system, see page
Convenient operation
The windows and the glass roof can also be operated via the door lock.
> Opening:
When the door is closed, turn the key in the door lock to the unlocking position and hold it there.
> Closing:
When the door is closed, turn the key to the locking position and hold it there.
Watch the closing movement to ensure that no-one is trapped. The movement is stopped when the key is released.
<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the key to the limit positions in the door lock.
Doors and the luggage compartment lid are unlocked or locked, but not deadlocked, with this button when the front doors are closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked * .
If only the driver's door has been unlocked with the remote control, see
, or with convenient access, see
, and you press the button, all the other doors, the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
A closed driver's door will be locked when the button is pressed.
<
Unlocking and opening
> Either use the central locking button to unlock all doors at once, then pull the door handle above the armrest,
> Or at each individual door, pull the door handle twice: the first time to unlock the door, and the second time to open it.
When the car's low-beam headlights are switched on, the inside door handles are illuminated. The lighting intensity is controlled together with the instrument lighting, see
.
<
Locking
> Either lock all doors at the central locking button,
> Or press the door safety lock buttons down.
To avoid being locked out of the car inadvertently, the driver's door cannot be locked using the safety lock button when it is open, or the
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
safety lock button on the driver's door is raised again after a short while when the door is open.
Persons remaining in the car or pets left inside can lock the doors from the inside.
You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the car can always be opened from the outside.
<
Lock
Doors
Soft Close Automatic*
To close the doors, push them to only lightly.
The actual closing action is automatic.
To avoid injuries, watch the closing movement and ensure that the doors can move without obstruction.
<
Luggage compartment lid
Opening from outside
All keys fit in the luggage compartment lid lock in the licence plate recess.
Opening separately
Insert the key into the luggage compartment lid lock and turn it fully to the right; the luggage compartment lid will open.
To avoid locking yourself out of the car inadvertently, never put the key or the remote control down inside the luggage compartment. The luggage compartment lid is locked again as soon as it is closed.
If you open the luggage compartment lid via the lock when the alarm system is armed, the alarm will be triggered. Therefore unlock the vehicle first. If an alarm was inadvertently triggered: switching off the alarm, see page 35 .
<
Locking separately
Press the button on the luggage compartment lid or press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid opens.
On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened with the remote control if the car has first been unlocked.
<
The luggage compartment lid swings rearwards and upwards when opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
<
The location of the switch varies according to the equipment specification.
1 Luggage compartment lid deadlocked
2 Luggage compartment lid not deadlocked
Push switch to position 1 . This deadlocks the luggage compartment lid and disconnects it from the central locking system.
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
If you now lock the storage compartment beneath the front armrest, see page
hand over only the remote control without the
key, see page 28 , it will not be possible to gain
access to the luggage compartment via the lid.
This is an advantage, for example, at hotels.
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, see Opening separately on page 33
.
Opening from inside
Automatic luggage compartment lid actuation*
Opening
The luggage compartment lid opens completely if you press:
> The button next to the steering column.
> The button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid, see page 33 .
> The button on the remote control, see
.
On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened with the remote control if the car has first been unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings rearwards and upwards when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
<
Closing
With this button, you can open the luggage compartment lid while the car is stationary, provided it is not deadlocked.
Closing
A recessed handle in the luggage compartment lid lining makes it easier to pull the lid down.
Soft Close Automatic
To close the luggage compartment lid, push it to only lightly. The actual closing action is automatic.
To avoid injuries, make sure that the closing area of the luggage compartment lid is unobstructed.
<
The luggage compartment lid closes automatically if you:
> Press the button.
> Press the button on the outside of the lug-
gage compartment lid, see page 33 .
> Press and hold down the button on the remote control.
The opening or closing process is interrupted if one of the buttons is pressed again or if the button is released. This also occurs if you hold down the lid. If you then press the button again, the luggage compartment lid reopens.
<
To avoid injuries, make sure that the closing area of the luggage compartment lid is unobstructed.
<
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, you can unlock the luggage compartment lid with the key, see
, and slowly open and close it without jerky movement.
Emergency release device*
Pull the lever in the luggage compartment. This will unlock the luggage compartment lid.
Even when the alarm system is armed, you can open the luggage compartment lid by means of the button on the remote control, see page
31 . When you subsequently close the lug-
gage compartment lid it is again locked and monitored.
On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid can only be opened with the remote control if the car has first been unlocked.
Unlocking certain national-market versions via the door lock triggers off the alarm.
Pressing and holding down the button for panic
mode also triggers off the alarm, see page 31 .
<
Switching off the alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, see page
> Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
Indicator light displays
Alarm system*
The principle
The alarm system reacts if:
> A door, the engine compartment lid or the luggage compartment lid is opened
> There is any movement inside the car: interior movement detector, see page
> The car's angle changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
> There is an interruption in the power supply from the battery
The alarm system will respond briefly to unauthorised attempts to access the car as follows:
> Acoustic alarm
> Activation * of the hazard warning system
Arming and disarming
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
> The indicator light beneath the inside mirror flashes steadily: the system is armed.
> The indicator light flashes after the car has been locked: the doors or luggage compartment lid have not been closed properly.
Even if an item is not closed fully, the remaining items are deadlocked and the indicator light begins to flash steadily after
10 seconds. However, the interior movement detector is not activated.
> The indicator light goes out after the car has been unlocked: no attempt was made to tamper with the car during your absence.
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> If the indicator light flashes after unlocking the car and until the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was made to tamper with the car.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's angle is monitored. The alarm is triggered for instance if an attempt is made to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.
Interior movement detector
Before the interior movement detector can operate correctly, the windows and the glass roof must be closed.
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector can be switched off together. This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following situations:
> In two-level garages
> When being transported on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector
Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the car is locked.
The indicator light comes on briefly, then continues to flash steadily. The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector are switched off until the car is next unlocked and locked.
Convenient access*
With convenient access you will be given access to your car, without having to take the remote control in the hand. It is sufficient if you carry the remote control with you, e.g. in the jacket pocket. The vehicle identifies the corresponding remote control when in the immediate vicinity or in the interior of the car automatically.
Convenient access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
> Starting the engine
Operating requirements
> The car can only be locked if the remote control in use is outside the vehicle.
> Approximately two seconds need to elapse before the car can be unlocked and locked again.
> The engine can only be started if the remote control in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with the conventional remote control
You can control the above functions using convenient access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control. Please familiarise yourself first with the notes on Opening and closing from
onwards.
The following describes the particularities for using convenient access.
A short delay when opening or closing the windows and glass roof indicates that a test is being carried out to ascertain whether there is a remote control inside the car. You may need to repeat the opening or closing operation.
<
Unlocking
Pull a door handle. This corresponds to pressing the button.
On some national-market versions, only the door on which you pulled the handle is unlocked.
You need to unlock the other doors from inside
via the central locking button, see page 32
.
<
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Locking
Press a door handle. This corresponds to pressing the button.
Please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off prior to locking in order to preserve the battery.
If a remote control is identified inside the car, it is unlocked again or cannot be locked.
<
Convenient closing
Press a door handle for longer.
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid, see page 33 . This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control has inadvertently been left inside the luggage compartment when the car is locked, the luggage compartment lid opens again.
<
Radio readiness
Briefly pressing the start/stop button switches on radio readiness, see page
.
Do not depress the brake, otherwise the engine will start.
<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition if a remote control is located inside the vehicle. The remote control must not be inserted in the ignition lock, see page
.
Before entering a car wash
1.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
2.
Engage transmission position N.
3.
Stop the engine.
4.
Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.
The car will be able to roll.
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction as a result of interference from local radio signals. Lock or unlock the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key via the door lock.
To start the engine afterwards, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
Changing the battery
In the remote control for convenient access there is a battery, which must be replaced if necessary.
1.
Remove the integrated key from the remote control, see page
2.
Press in the catch, see arrow 1 , e.g. with the aid of the key.
3.
Remove the cover for the battery compartment, arrow 2 .
4.
Insert a new battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.
5.
Press the cover back into position.
Dispose of the old battery only at an authorised collecting point or hand it in to
BMW Service.
<
Windows
Observe the windows during the closing procedure, to avoid any injuries. Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children, for example, could operate the windows and possibly injure themselves.
<
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening, closing
> Press the switch up to the pressure point:
The window is opened for as long as you press the switch.
> Push the switch past the pressure point:
The window opens automatically. Push the switch again to halt the opening movement.
Close the window similarly by pulling the switch.
After the ignition is switched off
You can still operate the windows:
> For some time with radio readiness switched on.
> For approx. 1 minute after the ignition has been switched off or the remote control removed.
To open, press the switch beyond the pressure point.
Trap protection
If the closing force of a window exceeds a specific value as it closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the windows are not obstructed as they close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.
Do not install any accessories in the movement range of the windows in order not to impair the trap protection function.
<
When the windows are being closed, the closing speed is reduced shortly before the limit position is reached, to allow greater responsiveness of the trap protection in this more critical zone.
<
Closing without the trap protection function
If an external hazard or ice on the windows prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the pressure point and keep it there. The trap protection function is restricted and the window opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2.
Pull the switch beyond the pressure point again within approx. 4 seconds and keep it there. The window closes without the trap protection function.
Safety switch
This enables you to prevent the rear door windows from being opened and closed with the switches in the rear seat area, for instance by children.
The same applies to:
> The adjustment of the electric rear seats,
> The adjustment of the electric head
restraints in the rear, see page 45
> The operation of the roller sun blinds at the
When the safety function is switched on, the
LED comes on.
Press the safety switch when carrying children on the rear seat, otherwise careless closing of the windows could result in injury.
<
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
To deactivate the function again, the remote control must be in the ignition lock, or with convenient access radio readiness must be switched on.
<
Glass roof, electric*
Observe the glass roof during the closing procedure, to avoid any injuries.
Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.
<
Raising
Press the switch.
If the glass roof is closed, it is raised and the sliding trim opens slightly.
Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with the roof in the raised position, as this could damage the mechanism.
<
Opening, closing
> Push the switch back as far as the pressure point.
The glass roof and sliding trim open in unison for as long as you hold the switch in position.
> Press the switch back beyond the pressure point.
The glass roof and sliding trim open automatically. The movement is stopped by pressing the switch.
The glass roof is closed in the same way by sliding the switch forwards. The sliding trim remains open and can be closed manually.
For convenient operation via the remote control or door lock see page
or
.
For convenience closing with convenient access see page
.
Opening and closing automatically
Press the switch beyond the pressure point.
Further to this, the following movements are automated:
> Press the switch with the roof open: the roof moves to the fully raised position.
> When the roof is raised, press the switch in the direction for opening: the roof moves to the fully open position.
The movement is stopped by pressing the switch.
After the ignition is switched off
You can still operate the roof:
> For some time with radio readiness switched on.
> For approx. 1 minute after the ignition has been switched off or the remote control removed.
Trap protection
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the centre of the roof aperture, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.
Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the roof is not obstructed as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.
<
Closing without the trap protection function
If there is an external hazard, push the switch forwards beyond the pressure point and keep it there. The roof closes without the trap protection function.
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
After a power failure
After a power failure, it is possible that the roof will only move to the raised position. Have the system initialised. BMW recommends that you have this work performed by BMW Service.
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, you can move the glass roof manually:
1.
Take out the interior light, reach behind the aperture and press out the cover.
2.
Insert the Allen key from the toolkit, see page
229 , into the designated aperture.
Turn the glass roof in the desired direction.
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
Safe seated position
A seated position that suitably reflects your requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driving with a minimum of fatigue. In conjunction with the seat belts, head restraints and airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. You should therefore observe the following notes in order to maintain the protective function of the car's safety systems.
For additional notes on carrying children in safety, see page
Airbags
Keep your distance from the airbags.
Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered. No other persons, pets or objects should be held or permitted to remain between the airbag and yourself.
Do not use the front airbag cover on the front passenger's side as a tray. Make sure that the front passengers likewise adopt a correct seated position and do not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel, for example, otherwise they could sustain leg injuries in the event of the front airbag being triggered. Make sure that passengers do not use the side or head-level airbags as head restraints, otherwise they may sustain injuries in the event of the airbags triggering.
<
Even if all these instructions are complied with, certain injuries as a result of contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending on the circumstances in which an accident occurs. Occupants with sensitive hearing may be subject to brief and generally temporary impaired hearing caused by the ignition and inflation noise.
The locations of the airbags and additional notes are given on page
Head restraints
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its centre is at approximately ear level; otherwise there is an increased risk of injury should an accident occur.
<
Adjusting head restraints, see page
.
Seat belt
All occupants should always fasten their seat belt before you set off. The airbags are a complementary safety feature and not a substitute for the seat belts.
Never restrain more than one person with each seat belt. Babies or small children must not travel on the lap of another occupant.
Around the pelvis, make sure that the belt sits firmly on the hips and does not press down on the stomach. The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It should not be pulled across sharp edges or routed or fastened over hard or fragile objects. Pull the seat belt tight and without twisting across the pelvis and shoulder and keep it as close as possible to the body in order to avoid it slipping over the hips and injuring the stomach in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.
<
Operating seat belts, see page 46 .
Seats
Note before adjusting
Do not reposition the driver's seat while the car is in motion. The seat could move unexpectedly, leading to the driver losing control of the car, so that an accident could be caused.
Do not recline the driver's or front passenger's
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
seat back too far while the car is being driven, otherwise there will be a risk of sliding under the seat belt in an accident, so that the belt loses its protective effect.
<
Observe also the notes on damaged seat belts on page
47 and on the active front head
restraint on page
.
The principle
The seats are adjusted in two stages:
1 Preselecting the function: the button lights up
2 Adjusting: control knob
> Push forward or back
> Push up or down
> Turn
Adjusting seat
You can adjust the functions that you have selected with the buttons at the control knob.
Observe the notes on adjusting on page
41 , or there may be a risk to your
personal safety.
<
3 Longitudinal direction:
Height:
Seat back:
This button is active by default.
42
4 Thigh support * :
Height:
Angle:
5 Lumbar support *
, see Adjusting lumbar support
6 Head restraint height * :
Adjusting Comfort seat at the front*
With this seat you can additionally adjust:
5 Seat back width: to increase or reduce lateral support
6
Shoulder support, see Adjusting shoulder support
Height of head restraint:
Seat back:
Automatic seat back width adjustment
To make it easier to get in and out of the driver's seat, the seat back automatically moves to its widest position before returning to the driving or memory position.
For both seats, this automatic feature is governed by the respective front door, as well as by the ignition in the case of the driver's seat and the belt buckle in the case of the front passenger's seat.
Adjusting lumbar support
5 Lumbar support
The seat's back contour can be altered to provide more support to the curved, lumbar section of the spine.
The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal column are supported, to encourage an upright but relaxed seated position.
>
>
To increase or reduce the curvature down
To move the curved section up or
Adjusting shoulder support
6 Adjusting angle of shoulder support:
The shoulder support also provides support for the back at shoulder level. This results in a relaxed seated position and reduces the load on the shoulder muscles.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting Comfort seat at the rear*
1 Longitudinal direction:
Height:
Angle:
2 Height of head restraint:
Seat back:
Press the button again, see arrow, to deactivate the function.
Adjusting basic position
You can adjust the functions that you have selected with the buttons at the control knob.
1 Longitudinal direction:
Angle:
Seat back:
This button is active by default.
2
Lumbar support, see Adjusting lumbar support
3 Shoulder support:
Height of the head restraint:
Seat back:
If the safety switch for the electric win-
dows has been pressed, see page 38
, the
Comfort seats cannot be adjusted.
<
Adjusting front passenger's seat from the rear
The basic position of the rear seats can be adjusted with the button. Press the button until the seat adjustment process is finished.
It may be necessary to restore the seat's basic position e.g. if fitting a child restraint system, see page
.
<
Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory*
You can adjust the front passenger's seat from the rear, e.g. to obtain more leg room at the rear.
Press the button, see arrow, to activate the function.
You can adjust the functions that you have selected with the buttons at the control knob.
You can memorise and call up two different positions for the driver's seat, outside mirrors and steering wheel.
On Comfort seats, you can additionally memorise and call up two seat positions for each further seat.
The lumbar support setting is not stored in the position memory.
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Memorising
1.
Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, see page
2.
Select the desired seat position and, in the case of the driver's seat, the outside mirror and steering wheel position.
3.
Press the M EMORY button:
The LED in the button comes on.
4.
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 :
The LED goes out.
Calling up
Do not call up memory when driving, otherwise there is risk of an accident due to unexpected seat or steering wheel movement.
<
Convenience function
1.
The driver's door is opened after unlocking or radio readiness is switched on.
2.
Briefly press memory button 1 or 2 as desired.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of the memory buttons.
Safety function
1.
Driver's door is closed and ignition switched either on or off.
2.
Press memory button 1 or 2 as desired until the adjusting procedure has been completed.
If the M EMORY button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED will go out.
the head restraints if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Install the head restraints again before transporting any passengers on the seats, otherwise the passenger's head will be unprotected.
<
Front: adjusting height
Mechanically
> Up: pull.
> Down: press the button, arrow 1 , and press the head restraint down.
Removing:
1.
Pull up the head restraint as far as the limit position.
2.
Press the button, arrow 1 , and remove the head restraint completely.
Electrically*
Head restraints
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its centre is at approximately ear level; otherwise there is an increased risk of injury should an accident occur. Only remove
44
1.
Select head restraint, button 1 .
2.
Adjust height, arrow 2 .
Removing:
1.
Extend the head restraint out in full.
2.
Pull the head restraint out entirely with an abrupt jerk.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Installing:
1.
Press the knob up, arrow 2 , for no more than about 10 seconds, but ideally only until a change in the humming noise indicates that a fitted head restraint has reached its top position.
2.
Insert the head restraint and press it down on both sides until it is heard and felt to engage in position.
Front: adjusting angle
Front head restraint, active*
The Comfort seats are equipped with an active head restraint.
In the event of a sufficiently serious rear-end collision, the active head restraint reduces the distance between itself and the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers or hang objects, e.g. coat-hangers, from the head restraints or attach accessories to the seat or head restraint; this will impair the protective function of the active head restraint, thereby putting personal safety at risk.
<
Rear: adjusting height
Mechanically
Tilt the head restraint as required.
On the Comfort seat, you adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of your head via the shoulder support, see
.
<
Front: adjusting side sections*
> Up: pull.
> Down: press the button, arrow 1 , and press the head restraint down.
Removing: as for front head restraints, mechanical.
Electrically*
Fold the head restraint's side sections forward to provide greater lateral support in the rest position.
The outer head restraints are extended automatically as soon as a rear passenger fastens the seat belt. You can in addition adjust the height of the head restraint electrically.
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Ensure that the space above the head restraints is clear, otherwise persons could be injured or objects damaged when the head restraints are extended.
<
You can use the safety switch, see page
38 , to deactivate head restraint
height adjustment.
<
Removing and installing: as for front head restraints, electric.
Centre head restraint
Pull out the retracted head restraint until it engages in position before the centre rear seat is occupied. Otherwise its protective effect will be impaired.
<
Rear: adjusting side sections*
Fold the head restraint's side sections forward to provide greater lateral support in the rest position.
Seat belts
Comply with the notes on page
there may be a risk to your personal safety.
<
All occupants should always fasten their seat belt before you set off. The airbags are a complementary safety feature and not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fastening
The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage.
Unfastening
1.
Hold onto the belt.
2.
Press the red button on the belt buckle.
3.
Guide the belt back up to the reel.
The upper belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any stature as long as they are sitting correctly, see page
The two seat belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are intended for the left and right seat occupants. The buckle marked CENTER is only to be used by a person occupying the centre rear seat.
Belt reminder for driver's and front passenger's seat*
Indicator light on the info display lights up and a signal sound is generated. In addition, a message will appear on the info display. Please check whether the seat belt is fastened correctly.
The belt reminder is issued as long as the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. On certain national-market versions, the belt reminder
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
is also activated at road speeds above approx.
8 km/h, approx. 5 mph, if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened, if heavy objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passengers unfasten their seat belts.
Damaged seat belts
Should the seat belts be placed under strain in the event of an accident or sustain damage, replace the belt system including the seat-belt tensioners and have the belt anchorage checked. Have this work performed only by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel, otherwise the correct functioning of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.
<
3.
If necessary select the symbol and press the controller, in order to change to the second page of the menu.
4.
Select "Seat temp." and press the controller.
5.
Select "Left" or "Right" and press the controller.
Heated seats*
Front
Press once per temperature stage.
Three lights indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press and hold down the button.
Temperature distribution
The temperature distribution between the seat cushion and seat back can be varied.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
6.
Turn in order to adjust temperature distribution on seat cushion and seat back, and press the controller.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Rear
Function as for heated front seats, without temperature distribution.
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Active seat ventilation*
Front
Active seat*
Press once per ventilation stage.
To switch off:
Press and hold down the button.
The highest stage with three lights lit is for a rapid cooling effect, e.g. if the car's interior has become very hot. After a short time a lower level is automatically activated to prevent chilling.
<
Rear
An active change to the seat cushion helps to avoid strain and signs of fatigue to the back muscles, which causes back pains in the lumbar region.
To switch on, press the button; the LED lights up.
Mirrors
Outside mirrors
Objects reflected in the mirrors are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from following traffic based on what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.
<
Functions as for ventilated front seats.
1 Adjusting
2 Changing over to the mirror on the other side or to the automatic parking function, see Passenger-side mirror tilt-down on
3 Folding mirrors in and out *
To memorise mirror positions, see Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory on
.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting manually
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually by pressing the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At speeds of up to approx. 20 km/h, approx.
12 mph, you can fold the mirrors in or out by pressing button 3 . This can for example be useful in car washes or narrow streets, or for instance to fold the mirrors back out into the correct position after they have been folded in manually.
Before putting the car through a car wash, fold the mirrors in either manually or by pressing button 3 , otherwise they could be damaged on account of the vehicle's width.
<
Automatic heating
Both outside mirrors are automatically heated when the ignition is switched on and when the auxiliary heater is running.
Passenger-side mirror tilt-down – automatic parking function*
Activating
1.
Push the mirror changeover switch to the position for the driver-side mirror, arrow 1 .
Deactivating
Push the mirror changeover switch to the position for the passenger-side mirror, arrow 2 .
Inside mirror
To reduce glare from following vehicles after dark, turn the knob beneath the mirror.
Inside and outside mirrors, automaticdim*
There are two photocells in the inside mirror for this purpose. One photocell is in the mirror glass, the other slightly offset on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photocells clean, do not cover the area between the inside mirror and windscreen, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windscreen directly in front of the mirror.
2.
Engage transmission position R.
The glass in the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. The road surface close to the car, e.g. the kerb, is then brought within the driver's field of view in the mirror, for instance while parking the car.
The parking position function is switched off if you are towing a trailer.
<
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Illuminated make-up mirror at the rear
1.
Press button 1 . The make-up mirror folds down.
2.
Pull the mirror down slightly, then pivot it.
Heated steering wheel*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heating is on, the LED in the button is lit.
3.
Before folding it back in, straighten the mirror, then push it upwards.
Adjusting steering wheel
Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the vehicle is in motion, otherwise an accident may result from an unexpected movement.
<
Programmable buttons
You can individually program the button on the steering wheel and the button next to the controller.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Car" and press the controller.
4.
Select " button" or " button". Press the controller as often as necessary until the desired function is displayed.
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.
To memorise steering wheel position, see Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory, page
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel temporarily moves to its highest most forward position.
This automatic system responds to the ignition and the driver's door.
> "Recirc. air"
The supply of outside air is permanently
shut off, see Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC/recirculated-air mode on page 99
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> "Nav. info"
Calling up last instruction by the navigation
system again, see Route guidance by spoken instructions on page 148 .
> "TP"
Switching traffic reports on/off, see also page 167
.
> "Short info"
Displaying the help and supplementary texts of the active menu for approx.
" button" can in addition be programmed with the following functions:
> "AUTO P"
Activating/deactivating, see page 57
.
> "NIGHT VISION"
Activating and deactivating BMW Night
.
Rear screen * :
> "Mode"
Selecting between the entertainment sources radio, compact disc CD and CD changer. Precondition for this is that one of these sources is activated.
> "FM" and "AM"
Switching between the frequency ranges
FM and AM, see also page
> "TP"
Switching traffic reports on/off, see also
.
Operating a function
Press the button on the steering wheel or the button next to the controller.
If you program the button on the steering wheel with "AUTO P", you can activate and deactivate Automatic Hold conveniently using the button, e.g. when manoeuvring into a parking space. For further details of Automatic
Hold, see page
onwards.
<
The setting of the button on the steering wheel is saved for the remote control currently in use.
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Carrying children in safety
Important considerations
Do not leave children unattended in the car, as they could otherwise endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.
<
All the seats in your BMW, except for the driver's seat, are in principle suitable for the installation of universal child restraint systems for all age groups, provided these have been approved for the age group in question.
Always carry children at the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under 12 or smaller than
150 cm, approx. 5 ft, should always travel at the rear using suitable child restraint systems, otherwise there is a greater risk of injury in the event of an accident.
<
Exception for the front passenger's seat
If you nevertheless need to fit a child restraint system on the front passenger's seat, the front and side airbags on the front passenger's side must be deactivated, otherwise a child travelling on that seat will be at considerable risk of injury if the airbags are triggered, even if it is wearing a child restraint system. < and renewed if necessary. Always have this work performed either by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel.
<
On the front passenger's seat
Before fitting a child restraint system on the front passenger's seat, make sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side have been deactivated, otherwise the child travelling on that seat will be at considerable risk of injury if the airbags are triggered.
<
Seat height
Before fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger's seat, move the seat up as far as it will go for the best possible seat belt position. Do not change this seat height any further.
Seat back width*
The seat back width adjustment feature of the front passenger's seat must be fully extended. Once the child seat has been fitted, do not call up a memory position, otherwise the stability of the child seat on the front passenger's seat will be restricted.
<
1.
Extend the seat back width adjustment feature fully, see Adjusting Comfort seat at the front on page
2.
Fit the child's seat.
Fitting child restraint systems
BMW Service can supply suitable child restraint systems for every age and weight category.
When selecting, installing and using child restraint systems, observe the manufacturer's instructions, otherwise the protective effect could be impaired.
Following an accident, have all components of the child restraint system and the seat belt that was used to secure it checked by BMW Service
ISOFIX child seat mountings
For details of how to install and use ISO-
FIX child restraint systems, please consult the separate operating and safety instructions supplied by the system's manufacturer.
<
If the car is equipped with electrically adjusted rear seats, restore the rear seat to its basic position before fitting ISOFIX child restraint systems, see page
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems
The following ISOFIX child restraint systems may be used on the front seats in your vehicle.
The corresponding designations can be found on the child seats.
A - ISO / F3
B - ISO / F2
B1- ISO / F2X
C - ISO / R3
D - ISO / R2
E - ISO / R1
Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors
Before fitting the child seat, pull the belt away from the area around the child seat mountings.
Make sure that both lower ISOFIX anchors are properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting securely against the seat back.
<
Rear seats
Firmly press the fitting aid in at the parting line between the base and back cushions, such that both funnels engage in the ISOFIX anchors located in the seat.
To remove, pull off the fitting aid.
Mounting points for upper ISOFIX retaining strap
Use the mounting points for the upper
ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting points could be damaged.
<
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are located at the positions marked by the arrows, in the gap between the seat and the seat back.
Fitting aid
The fitting aid makes it easier to fit ISOFIX child restraint systems and also protects the surface of the seat upholstery.
The fitting aid can be obtained from BMW
Service. Observe the operating and safety instructions of the fitting aid manufacturer.
<
There are two additional mounting points for
ISOFIX child restraint systems with an upper retaining strap, see arrows.
Path for the upper retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not pass over sharp edges and is not twisted on its path to the upper mounting point.
Otherwise the child restraint system cannot protect the child as intended in the event of an accident.
<
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Child safety catches in rear doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraints
3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear shelf
6 Seat back
7 Upper retaining strap of the child restraint system
Before use, flip the mounting points upwards.
1.
Pull the head restraint upwards.
2.
Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint posts.
3.
Use the hook to clip the upper retaining strap onto the mounting point.
4.
Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.
5.
Pull the retaining strap taut.
Push down the locking lever on the rear doors:
The door in question can now only be opened from the outside.
Safety switches for electric windows and rear seats
With electric rear seats, adjust the basic position prior to using a child restraint system, see
.
Press the safety switch for the power windows, see page
, when children are seated in the rear seat.
The safety switch also prevents the electric rear seats from being adjusted.
Avoid uncontrolled adjusting of the electric rear seats, otherwise it can result in injury or damage to the child restraint system.
<
When driving with children
In the rear compartment, do not allow children travelling in child seats to lean out towards the door trim, as serious injuries could occur if the side airbags were to be triggered.
<
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control fully into the ignition lock. Radio readiness is switched on. Individual power consumers are ready to operate.
Ignition switched on
All systems are ready to operate.
When the engine is switched off, please switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers you are not using in order to preserve the battery.
<
Ignition switched off
All indicator lights on the info display go out.
Only the selector lever indicator of the automatic transmission remains lit briefly.
Start/stop button
Each time the start/stop button is pressed briefly, radio readiness or the ignition are switched on or off.
Pressing the start/stop button briefly while the brake or clutch is depressed will start the engine.
<
Radio readiness
Individual power consumers are ready to operate. The time and outside temperature are shown on the info display.
Starting the engine
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can lead to loss of consciousness with fatal consequences. The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.
Do not leave the car unattended with the engine running, as this constitutes a hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine still running, engage selector lever position P and apply the parking brake, otherwise the car could start to move.
<
Avoid starting, stopping and restarting the engine in rapid succession or repeated attempts to start the engine if it does not fire, otherwise unburned or only partially combusted fuel could reach the catalytic converter, which could overheat and be damaged as a result.
<
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
1.
Depress the brake.
2.
Briefly press the start/stop button.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine.
Do not warm up the engine with the car at a standstill; it is better to set off, driving at moderate engine speeds.
Diesel engine
With a cold engine and temperatures below approx. 0 6 /32 7 , the engine is preheated automatically. The preheat indicator light on the info display comes on, accompanied by a message on the info display.
Bleeding the fuel system
Even if the fuel tank has been run dry, the fuel system does not need to be bled. Switch on the ignition for approx. 1 minute before starting the engine.
Before entering a car wash
The car may roll if you:
1.
With convenient access: insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
2.
Engage transmission position N.
3.
Stop the engine.
4.
Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.
Position P will be engaged:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> When you remove the remote control from the ignition lock
Observe the messages on the info display.
Removing the remote control from the ignition lock
Press the remote control in briefly; it is ejected a short way. The ignition is in addition switched off if it was previously on.
Convenience function
To stop the engine with a stationary vehicle, press the start/stop button longer than approx.
2 seconds. The remote control will be ejected a short way.
Stopping the engine
Always take the remote control with you when you leave the car.
<
With the car at a standstill, briefly press the start/stop button. Radio readiness is switched on.
The transmission switches automatically to position P: interlock.
Parking brake
The principle
Your BMW is fitted with an electromechanical parking brake.
The main purpose of the parking brake is to prevent the vehicle rolling when stationary.
You can use the parking brake in two ways:
> Manually, by pressing the button briefly.
> Automatically, by activating Automatic
Hold, see page
.
As soon as you switch off the engine, the parking brake is applied electro-mechanically to the rear wheels.
When the engine is running, the parking brake acts on the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Braking sensation
The hydraulic braking system may produce a rather unaccustomed response. Any noises generated during this process are normal.
Applying the brake manually
Briefly press the button; the PARK logo on the info display lights up.
The indicator light on the info display lights
up red, see page 10 . The parking brake is
applied.
To apply the parking brake the remote control must not be inserted into the ignition lock.
However, it cannot be released unless the ignition is switched on.
If for exceptional reasons it is necessary to apply the parking brake while on the move, press the button for a while.
The indicator light on the info display lights red, a gong sounds and the brake lights come on.
The car is braked rapidly for as long the button is pressed.
If you brake the car almost to a standstill, approx. 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph, the parking brake remains on.
Releasing the brake manually
Press the button briefly with the ignition switched on.
The indicator light on the info display goes out.
You can also release the parking brake after switching off the engine provided the remote control is still inserted in the ignition lock. This function is useful e.g. in the car wash, see page
<
When leaving the car, remove the remote control from the ignition lock and take it with you, otherwise children remaining in the car could for instance release the parking brake.
<
Automatic Hold
After the engine has been started, the system can be activated until the engine is switched off again.
This function supports you while on the move by automatically applying and releasing the parking brake, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights or in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle will be held automatically, since the idling drag is suppressed by an engaged drive position.
When moving off uphill, the car is prevented from rolling backwards unintentionally.
If you switch off the engine with the car at a standstill, the parking brake is automatically applied.
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Hold via the menu "Settings" of iDrive.
Activating/deactivating
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Car" and press the controller.
4.
Select "AUTO P". Press the controller to activate/deactivate the desired function.
> Automatic Hold is activated.
The green AUTO P logo on the info display indicates that the system is operational.
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> Automatic Hold is deactivated.
The green AUTO P logo on the info display goes out.
You can programme the programmable button on the steering wheel with the
Automatic Hold function, see page 50
.
This gives you the option of activating or deactivating Automatic Hold quickly and without being distracted from the traffic situation.
<
Driving
When the car is halted, the parking brake is applied automatically.
The indicator light on the info display lights up green.
To move off, simply press the accelerator. The parking brake is automatically released, and the indicator light goes out.
Do not drive through a car wash with the engine running and Automatic Hold activated. Otherwise the parking brake will be applied when the car comes to a standstill.
<
Parking
If you switch off the engine with the car at a standstill, the parking brake is automatically applied.
The indicator light changes from green to red.
You can manually release the parking brake also after stopping the engine, provided the remote control is still inserted in the ignition lock, see page
tion, e.g. in the car wash.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
<
When leaving the car, always remove the remote control from the ignition lock, otherwise any children remaining in the car could for instance release the parking brake.
<
For your safety
Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically if:
> The engine is stopped
> No occupant is detected on the driver's seat when the engine is running
> The engine compartment lid is opened while the engine is running
> The luggage compartment lid is opened while the engine is running and position R is engaged, and
> The parking brake is used to brake the moving car to a standstill
The indicator light changes from green to red and the AUTO P logo on the info display goes out.
Before moving off, either release the parking brake manually by briefly pressing the button, see page
, or activate Automatic Hold again, see page
.
Before leaving the car with the engine still running, engage the automatic transmission position P and ensure that the parking brake is applied. The car could otherwise start to move.
<
Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated if any movement of the car on a slippery surface is identified.
Observe the messages on the info display. For further details of Check Control, see page
.
<
Releasing the parking brake manually
In the event of a power interruption or an electrical fault you can release the parking brake manually.
Before releasing the parking brake manually and each time the vehicle is parked with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is
engaged, see page 60 , observing the informa-
tion shown on the info display.
If the road's incline is unavoidably very steep, be sure to secure the vehicle additionally against
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
rolling away, e.g. with the wheel chock, see
. Depending on the incline of the road, there is otherwise a risk of the vehicle rolling away.
<
If the automatic transmission's interlock has also to be released manually, observe the following sequence:
1.
Depending on the circumstances, first release the parking brake manually.
2.
Then release the automatic transmission's
interlock manually, see page 61 .
Starting assistance and towing away, see from
.
What you need
1 Screwdriver handle
2 Release tool
3 Open-ended spanner, 10 mm, approx.
0.4 in, jaw width
The tools are in the toolkit in the luggage compartment lid, see page
Fit the screwdriver handle on the release tool, as illustrated.
Releasing
1.
Take out the floor mat and spare wheel cover.
2.
Introduce the release tool with screwdriver handle into the aperture, arrow 1 .
3.
Fit the open-ended spanner on the hexagonal part of the release tool.
Insert the release tool all the way, overcoming the spring force in the process, and turn it in the direction of arrow 2 until it noticeably engages and some resistance is felt.
4.
Without releasing against the mechanical resistance of the drive, rotate further in arrow direction 2 until significant force increase is felt.
Release the parking brake fully, otherwise the rear brake system may be damaged if you drive on with it partly applied.
<
5.
Stow away the tools.
6.
Fit the spare wheel cover and the floor mat again.
Have a fault rectified either by the nearest
BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If the parking brake has been released manually because of a fault, it can only be restored to normal operating mode by a trained mechanic.
<
After releasing manually, the actual status of the parking brake may not correspond to the status shown by the indicator light.
<
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Start-up following a power failure
Only if the parking brake was manually released due to power failure is it possible to put it in operation again. The function of the parking brake will otherwise not be assured and there is a risk of the car starting to roll even though the parking brake is applied.
<
You can resume use of the parking brake when the power supply has been re-established:
With the vehicle stationary and the ignition switched on, briefly press the button three times at intervals of approx. 5 seconds. This starts the following initialisation process:
> Initialising of the release position.
> Applying: the new conditions are learned and the brake position is initialised.
The indicator light on the info display lights up red.
> Releasing: the parking brake is once again operational.
The indicator light on the info display goes out.
The transmission position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.
Engaging transmission positions
> Transmission positions D, R or N only to be engaged when the engine is running: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first press the brake, otherwise the desired gearshift will not be performed: shiftlock.
Apply the brake until you are ready to move off; this will prevent the car creeping when a drive position is selected.
You can activate Automatic Hold to suppress this creeping movement, see
.
<
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can perform manual gearshifts with the buttons on the steering wheel, see page
Transmission positions
P R N D
Displays on the info display
P R N D S or M1 up to M6
The position selected is shown on the info display.
Engaging D, R or N
Gently pull the selector lever and engage the desired position:
> N Neutral:
As far as the pressure point, arrow N .
> D Drive:
Down beyond the pressure point, arrow D .
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> R Reverse:
Up beyond the pressure point, arrow R .
As soon as you release the selector lever, it returns to the centre position.
Engaging P
Press button P .
P Park
Engage this position only when the car is standing still. The rear wheels are locked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as you switch off the engine, unless N is already engaged and the remote control is in the ignition lock, see page
.
<
R Reverse
Engage this position only when the car is standing still.
N Neutral
You can for instance select this in a car wash.
The car will be able to roll.
N remains engaged even after stopping the engine if you leave the remote control in the ignition lock. This function is useful e.g. in the car wash.
P is engaged automatically after approx.
30 minutes. Observe the messages on the info display.
Stopping the engine, see page 56 .
<
D Drive, automatic position
Drive position for all normal driving. All forward gears are selected as necessary.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance.
Press the accelerator pedal down to the regular full-throttle position; resistance will be felt.
Sport program and manual operation
Press button 1 on the steering wheel.
The sport program is activated and S displayed on the info display. This program is recommended for a performance oriented driving style.
Press button 1 again to switch to manual operation and then back to the automatic program.
In manual operation, Steptronic changes gear when you briefly press one of the buttons 2 on the front or rear side of the steering wheel. M1 to M6 is indicated on the info display.
Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at a suitable engine or road speed; for example, the transmission will not shift down if the resulting engine speed would be too high. On the info display the selected gear is briefly shown, followed by the gear actually in use.
Press button 1 again to change back to the automatic program.
Manual release and application of the transmission interlock
In the event of power failure, e.g. if the battery is flat or disconnected or if there is an electrical fault, the transmission interlock must be released manually, otherwise the rear wheels
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
will lock and it will not be possible to tow the vehicle away.
When releasing the transmission interlock manually, press the brake, otherwise there is a risk that the vehicle could start to roll.
<
Only release the transmission interlock manually for towing away the car. Engage the transmission interlock again after parking the car.
If the parking brake must also be manually released, observe the following sequence:
1.
First release the parking brake manually, see page
2.
Then release the automatic transmission's interlock manually.
Releasing
1.
Release the cover on the underside of the instrument panel and fold it down. To do this, turn the lock anticlockwise e.g. with the aid of a coin.
Locking
1.
Squeeze together the red locking lever, arrow, and the release lever to disengage the release lever.
2.
Guide the release lever back to the limit position – the transmission interlock is now engaged again.
3.
Fold the cover back up and secure it.
Starting assistance and towing away, see from
.
Flashing turn indicators/ headlight flasher
2.
Pull out release lever at the loop 1 until it engages in position: the transmission interlock is released.
Engage the transmission interlock again after parking the car. There is otherwise a risk of the car starting to roll.
<
1 High-beam headlight
2 Headlight flasher
3 Flashing turn indicator
Indicating a turn
Press the lever beyond the pressure point.
To cancel it manually, press the lever as far as the pressure point.
If the indicator light flashes more rapidly than usual, a flashing turn indicator bulb has failed; if towing a trailer, the failed bulb could also be one of the trailer.
<
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the pressure point and hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal
Press the lever as far as the pressure point; the flashing turn indicator flashes three times.
sensor is located on the windscreen, directly in front of the inside mirror.
Activating the rain sensor
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or flick-wipe
3 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
4 Cleaning windscreen, headlights and BMW
Night Vision camera *
5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity
Switching on wipers
The lever returns to the home position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The wipers switch to intermittent wipe as the car comes to a halt.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the pressure point.
The wipers switch to normal speed as the car comes to a halt.
Rain sensor
The speed of the wipers is regulated automatically according to how hard it is raining. The rain
Briefly press the button, arrow; the wipers move once across the windscreen. The LED comes on.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity
Turn knurled wheel 5 .
Deactivating the rain sensor
Briefly press the button again, arrow. The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic car wash, to prevent the car's wipers from being activated inadvertently and damaged.
<
Cleaning windscreen, headlights and
BMW Night Vision camera*
Fluid from the washer reservoir is sprayed on to the windscreen and the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the headlights and the BMW Night Vision camera are cleaned together with the headlights at appropriate intervals.
Only operate the washer systems and cleaning equipment if you are certain that the fluid will not freeze on the windscreen and interfere with the view ahead. Washer fluid containing antifreeze should therefore be added to
Do not use the washer systems if the fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will be damaged.
<
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Windscreen washer jets
The windscreen washer jets and the windscreen around the rest position of the wipers are heated automatically while the ignition is switched on.
Folding the wipers out
This is important e.g. for changing the wiper blades or for preventing the blades from freezing to the windscreen.
1.
Switch off the engine and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
2.
Press the wiper lever upwards beyond the pressure point for approx. 3 seconds until the wipers halt in a roughly vertical position, from which they can be folded away from the windscreen.
After folding the wipers back down against the windscreen, the wiper system must be reactivated:
1.
Switch on radio readiness.
2.
Briefly press the wiper lever downwards.
The wipers move to the home position and are now operational again.
Swing the wipers back down on to the windscreen before radio readiness or the ignition is switched on, otherwise damage could be caused if the wipers are switched on.
<
Washer fluid
Antifreeze for the washer fluid is highly flammable. Keep it away from possible ignition sources and store it only in the carefully sealed original containers, out of reach of children. Comply with the instructions on the pack.
<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only top up the washer fluid when the engine is cool in order to avoid contact with hot engine components. Otherwise there will be a fire risk if the fluid is spilt and a risk to personal safety.
<
All washer jets are supplied from a reservoir.
When filling with water, to which antifreeze has been added if required, always follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Mix the water with the antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir, to make sure the correct concentration is maintained.
<
Capacity
Approx. 6 litres, approx. 10 pints.
Programmable cruise control
The principle
You can activate the programmable cruise control once you reach a speed of approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph. The car then maintains and memorises the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.
Using the multistage function, you can in addition program six desired speeds and call them up during a journey with the lever, see page
.
This enables you to adapt your speed rapidly to the prevailing traffic situation, e.g. if you reach a road sign indicating a particular speed limit.
Do not use the programmable cruise control if adverse conditions prevent driving at constant speed, e.g. winding roads, heavy traffic or poor surface conditions such as snow, rain, ice or loose material. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
<
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining and memorising speed, accelerating
2 Maintaining and memorising speed, decelerating
3 Interrupting or deactivating cruise control
4 Recalling a speed
Maintaining and memorising speed, accelerating
Press the lever as far as the pressure point, arrow 1 :
The car's current speed is maintained and memorised. The needle 5 in the speedometer
indicates this speed, see Displays in the speedometer on page 65 . Each time the lever is
pressed again, the car's speed increases by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
Press the lever longer as far as the pressure point:
The car accelerates without the accelerator pedal being pressed. As soon as you release the lever, the speed that the car has reached will be maintained and memorised.
Press the lever beyond the pressure point if no desired speeds 6 have been memorised:
The needle 5 jumps to the next multiple of
10 km/h or 5 mph and continues to jump for as long as you hold the lever in position.The speed now displayed is established and memorised.
If engine braking alone is insufficient on a downhill slope, the desired speed may be exceeded.
It may also prove impossible to maintain speed with the available engine power on uphill slopes.
Maintaining and memorising speed, decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2 :
Functions as 1 , except that the car's speed is reduced instead.
Interrupting cruise control
Briefly press the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3 .
In addition, you interrupt the cruise control function automatically:
> When braking
> When engaging the position N of the automatic transmission
> When DSC has cut in
Recalling a speed
Briefly press button 4 :
The memorised speed is recalled and maintained.
Displays in the speedometer
5 Needle for memorised speed
>
>
Cruise control activated
Cruise control interrupted
6 Marker for memorised desired speed in the multistage function
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Memorising desired speeds
With the car at a standstill
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press, arrow 1 , or pull, arrow 2 , the lever beyond the pressure point:
You can now move the needle 5 with the lever until you have reached your desired speed:
> Press or pull the lever again as far as the pressure point: the needle will move slowly.
> Press or pull the lever again beyond the pressure point: the needle jumps to the next multiple of 10 km/h or 5 mph and continues to jump for as long as you hold the lever in position.
3.
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds. The memorised desired speed is indicated by a marker 6 .
If six desired speeds have already been memorised, you must delete at least one of them before you can memorise a new one.
While driving
1.
Press, arrow 1 , or pull, arrow 2 , the lever beyond the pressure point:
2.
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds. The current speed is applied as the desired speed and displayed by means of 6 .
If all speed markers 6 flash twice, there are already six desired speeds memorised. Please delete at least one of them.
Deleting a desired speed
1.
Select the desired speed 6 in question, see further below.
2.
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds.
Activating multistage function
Press, arrow 1 , or pull, arrow 2 , the lever beyond the pressure point.
Your current speed is maintained and memorised, and displayed by 5 .
Selecting desired speed
Press, arrow 1 , or pull, arrow 2 , the lever beyond the pressure point:
The next desired speed is selected.
Deactivating the system
> Press the lever up or down for approx.
3 seconds, arrow 3 , or
> Switch off the ignition.
The memorised speed 5 is deleted but the memorised markers 6 remain visible.
Active Cruise Control*
The principle
Active Cruise Control enables you to select a speed which the car will then maintain automatically, assuming your progress is not obstructed.
Subject to reasonable limits, the system automatically adjusts the speed of your car if you come up behind a slower vehicle. The distance that the system keeps from the vehicle travelling in front can be varied in four steps. For safety reasons, this distance depends on the speeds in question. To maintain sufficient distance, the system automatically closes down the throttle, applies the brakes if necessary, and speeds up again if the vehicle in front accelerates. As soon as the road ahead becomes clear, it accelerates to your desired speed again. This speed will also be maintained on downhill slopes, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if the engine output is insufficient.
Read and carefully observe the information on
the limits of the system as from page 70 , so that
you can perfectly use the system and its application range.
Braking sensation
> If the system brakes and you depress the brake pedal additionally, you will get a slightly different feeling when braking.
> You should expect to hear some noise during automatic braking.
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
When to use it
The optimum road speed range on main roads and motorways in good condition is approx.
80 to 140 km/h, approx. 50 to 85 mph. Make sure that you observe the speed limits applicable.
The minimum desired speed is 30 km/h or
20 mph, and the maximum speed 180 km/h or
110 mph.
Active Cruise Control cannot relieve you from personal responsibility.
You should decide on the basis of the road, traffic and visibility conditions whether and how to use the system.
Only use the system in traffic that is flowing at a steady speed; do not use it on loose roads, or on slippery surfaces, in fog or in heavy rain.
Adjust your desired speed to the traffic conditions, and check your driving speed and stopping distance. Be prepared to brake at all times.
Otherwise, driving conditions could result which pose a risk of accident.
<
One lever for all functions
Memorising the current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1 , or pull briefly, arrow 2 .
The current speed is memorised and displayed briefly on the speedometer, see arrow.
Increasing desired speed
Press or tap the lever to the pressure point or beyond, arrow 1 , until the desired speed is displayed.
The speed that is then shown is memorised and will be achieved on a clear road.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the pressure point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the pressure point, the desired speed is increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or
5 mph on the speedometer display.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2 , until the desired speed is displayed.
These functions are operated similarly to increasing the desired speed.
1 Memorising and increasing the desired speed
2 Memorising and reducing the desired speed
3 Deactivating cruise control, see page 68
4 Recalling memorised speed and distance, see page 69
5 Selecting the distance to the vehicle travel-
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Selecting the distance Deactivating cruise control
> Up:
To increase the distance
> Down:
To reduce the distance
The selected distance is displayed in the speedometer.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
When you switch on the system for the first time after starting the engine, this distance is always preset.
This corresponds to approx. half the numerical value on the km/h speedometer display.
Distance 4
Adapt the distance from the vehicle in front to the traffic and weather conditions, otherwise there is a risk of accidents. Observe the prescribed safety distance in each case.
<
Press lever upwards or downwards. The displays in the speedometer go out.
The system is additionally automatically deactivated:
> When you apply the brakes
> When you engage transmission position N
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC has cut in
> If the system does not recognise objects for a longer time, e.g. on quiet roads without roadside lines or due to dirty radar sensor,
> When your road speed is less than 30 km/h or 20 mph due to a traffic situation
If the system is deactivated, active intervention by braking and possibly also evasive action may be necessary to avoid the risk of an accident.
<
Whenever the ignition is switched off, the desired speed stored in the memory is deleted.
Background lighting
You can switch off the background lighting of the speedometer and revolution counter when the system is deactivated if no other functions are displayed, e.g. the advance warning field in the revolution counter, see page
guidance for the navigation system.
To do this, press the lever up or down for approx. 1 second.
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Recalling the memorised desired speed and distance level
Press button 4 :
The displays appear in the speedometer.
The speed stored in the memory is deleted by switching off the ignition.
Displays on the info display
The preconditions for the operation of Active Cruise Control are not fulfilled, e.g. as a result of intervention of ABS or DSC. The system intervenes by applying the brakes until you actively take over.
Radar sensor
1 Stored desired speed
2 Lights: vehicle travelling in front recognised
3 Selected distance from vehicle in front
4 The stored desired speed is briefly displayed, see page 67
If the display ACC --- km/h or --- mph appears briefly in the speedometer, it is possible that the system's operating conditions are momentarily not met. Calling up Check
Control messages, see page
.
<
Warning lights
The display 2 flashes, a signal sounds.
The system instructs you to intervene by braking and, if necessary, taking evasive action. Active
Cruise Control is unable to restore the distance between your car and the vehicle in front automatically.
This display does not, however, relieve you of the responsibility to adapt your desired speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.
Heavy rain, dirt, snow and ice may impair the system's ability to detect preceding vehicles. If necessary, clean the radar sensor at the front of the car, beneath the bumper. Take particular care when removing snow and ice.
If the sensor is not correctly aligned then the
Active Cruise Control cannot be activated.
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
System limits
The range of the radar sensor and the system's capacity for braking the car automatically are limited. For instance, two-wheel vehicles travelling in front might not be detected.
The system will not brake the car if you approach a stationary obstruction on your side of the road, e.g. a vehicle standing at red traffic lights or the end of traffic congestion. You yourself must react, otherwise there is the risk of an accident.
<
The system does not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles pulling out
evasive action. You yourself must react, otherwise there is the risk of an accident.
<
Bends in the road
If the desired speed selected is excessive for a bend, the system will reduce the speed while the car is taking the bend. However, it is unable to anticipate how sharp a bend in the road is. At the beginning of a curve, therefore select an appropriate speed.
Due to the sensor's restricted range, the situation may arise where a preceding vehicle may not be detected on a bend in the road, or detected very late.
If a vehicle pulls out in front of you, e.g. after overtaking, the system will not identify the vehicle until it has moved entirely into the same lane as your car.
If another vehicle suddenly pulls out in front of you, the system may not be able to re-establish the selected distance of its own accord. This also applies to high speed differences to the vehicles in front, e.g. when approaching a lorry at a high speed. When the system is certain that it has identified a vehicle in front of you, it will prompt you to intervene by applying the brakes and if necessary by taking
When your car is approaching a bend, in view of its curvature the system may respond temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. A possible reduction in the vehicle's speed by the system
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
can be compensated for by briefly accelerating.
When the accelerator is released again, the system will resume control of the car's speed.
Your sovereignty
Your actions have priority in every case. If, whilst driving, you depress the accelerator during Active Cruise Control, automatic braking will be deactivated until you release the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator is released, the desired speed is re-established or the selected distance from the vehicle in front taken into account.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator pedal, and make sure that no objects such as floor mats are resting on the accelerator pedal, otherwise the system will not be able to brake the car.
<
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
Distance recorder, outside temperature display, clock
1 Outside temperature display, clock
2 Distance recorder – odometer
3 Trip distance recorder
4 Press the knob:
> With the ignition switched on, resets the trip distance recorder
> With the ignition switched off, briefly displays distance recorder, outside temperature and time
Outside temperature display, clock, date
From radio readiness onwards, the outside temperature and time are displayed.
You can change the units of measurement,
6 / 7 in the menu "Settings", see page
Adjusting the time, see page 81
.
The date is displayed in the assistance window *
Outside temperature warning
If the display falls to +3 6 /37 7 , a signal sounds and a message is displayed on the info display. There is an increased risk of black ice.
Ice can still form even at temperatures above +3 6 /37 7 . You should therefore drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads; otherwise there is an increased risk of accident.
<
Distance recorder and trip distance recorder
The display is shared with the computer and the
Check Control.
Irrespective of what the display is currently showing, you can call up the distance recorder briefly by pressing button 4 .
Press the button again to set the trip distance recorder to zero.
Check Control, see page
.
.
Revolution counter
The orange advance warning field, arrow, is displayed depending on the engine temperature.
The advance warning field goes out when the engine temperature has risen sufficiently.
Avoid engine speeds in the advance warning field if possible.
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine become too hot, a warning light will come on. In addition, a message will appear on the control display.
Checking coolant level, see page 226
.
Computer
Calling up functions
The computer information can be called up on the info display by using the buttons on the flashing turn indicator lever.
1 Info display, left
2 Info display, right
Every time you briefly press the button, another function is displayed.
Displays on the info display
The sequence of displays is:
> Fuel gauge
> Range and distance to destination
The sequence of displays is:
> Distance recorder – odometer
> Energy control/current fuel consumption
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed
> Arrival time
Hiding messages
Press and hold down button 1 to close the computer displays. Briefly press the button a further time to call up the last display again.
However, it is not possible to hide a message if a Check Control message is being displayed.
<
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge is flashed up automatically once the reserve level is reached. The following amount of fuel is still in the tank:
> 730i/Li, 730d/Ld: approx. 8 litres, approx.
1.8 gal
> 740i/Li, 750i/Li and 745d: approx. 10 litres, approx. 2.2 gal
> 760i/Li: approx. 12 litres, approx. 2.6 gal
If the car is inclined for some time, for example on a long mountain road, the value in the display may fluctuate to some extent.
Once the reserve level is reached, the info display can no longer be closed. However, you can still have the range displayed.
<
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 88 litres, approx.
19.4 gal. For details on filling the fuel tank, see page
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Add fuel in good time, as certain engine functions are not assured if the fuel level is allowed to fall very low, and damage may occur.
<
Range
This display indicates how far the car can probably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.
It is calculated on the basis the way the car has been driven over the past 30 km, approx.
20 miles.
If the range is below 50 km, approx.
30 miles, you must refuel the car, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.
<
The computer registers fuel added to the tank if the quantity exceeds approx. 5 litres, approx.
1.1 gal.
Distance to destination
The remaining distance to your destination is displayed if you have entered a distance in the
navigation system, see page 133
, or a distance manually in the computer before the start of
.
The distance to the destination using the route planned by the navigation system is automatically used.
If you enter a destination in the navigation system, any manual inputs are overwritten by the calculated distance after approx.
500 m or 625 yd, at the latest.
<
Energy control/current fuel consumption
Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This enables you to check how economical and environmentally friendly your current driving style is.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period since the engine was last started.
Average speed
The calculation of average speed ignores any stationary periods where the engine was switched off.
You can reset the values for average fuel consumption and average speed, see Resetting
For different routes
You can have the average speed and average fuel consumption displayed for two different routes:
>
See Displays on the control display below
>
See Journey computer on page 75
Arrival time
An estimated arrival time is displayed if you have entered a destination in the navigation system before the start of your journey, see
, or a distance manually in the compu-
.
This presupposes that you have set the
<
Displays on the control display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; operating principle, see page
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select "BC" and press the controller.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and remaining distance:
> Manually enter a distance into the com-
puter, see Entering distance manually
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
> Range before refuelling
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:
1.
Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
2.
Press the controller again to confirm your selection.
This also resets the displays on the info display.
An independent air conditioning system influences the average consumption, average speed and travelling time. As a result, these values may rise.
<
Entering distance manually
1.
Select "To dest." and press the controller.
Via the voice input system
{ On-board computer } .
Journey computer
The journey computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday trip.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select "BC " and press the controller.
> Departure time
> Journey time
> Distance covered
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed
Switching the journey computer on/off and resetting all values:
Select "START / RESET" and press the controller.
Stopping the journey computer:
Select "STOP" and press the controller.
2.
Turn the controller to set the distance to the destination.
3.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance to the destination is automatically determined during the guidance to the destination by the navigation system, see page
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Service requirements
Symbols
No servicing is currently needed.
Servicing or an inspection required by law is due. Please arrange a service appointment soon.
Servicing is overdue.
The time or distance remaining to the next service are displayed briefly after the ignition has been switched on.
Ongoing service requirements will be read out from the remote control by your
Service Advisor.
<
With BMW Assist enabled, the data on the service status of your car or on statutory inspections is transmitted automatically when a service or inspection is imminent, see Automatic Service
.
Further information
You can have further information on the scope of service work required displayed on the control display.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select and press the controller.
The list of selected maintenance routines and inspections required by law is displayed.
You can have more information on each entry displayed:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Arrow is selected. Press the controller.
Periods during which the battery is disconnected or the battery switch is in the
OFF position are ignored by the Condition
Based Service CBS.
It is therefore important to ensure that the brake fluid is changed every two years at the latest, even if the display indicates that a change is not yet due.
The same principle applies to other time-based maintenance aspects.
<
Displaying and entering dates for statutory vehicle inspections
Make sure that the date and the time are set correctly, see page
, otherwise the Condition
Based Service CBS cannot function correctly.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select and press the controller.
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Select "§ Stat. periodic insp." and press the controller.
Display on the info display
5.
Turn the controller to select input of the date.
6.
Press the controller.
The month is selected.
7.
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
The distance and time remaining to the date that has been entered for the statutory vehicle inspection is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on if the inspection is due imminently.
Ongoing service requirements will be read out from the remote control by your
Service Advisor.
<
8.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is selected.
9.
Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
11.
"CONFIRM" is selected. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date input is memorised.
The list of entries is sorted anew according to date.
Check Control
Principle
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any faults in the systems monitored. The system alerts you by means of indicator or warning lights on the info display, possibly accompanied by an acoustic signal, and text messages on the info display.
Indicator and warning lights
Indicator and warning lights may light up in a variety of combinations and colours.
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Explanatory text messages
Text messages on the info display illustrate the importance of the indicator and warning lights displayed.
Some Check Control messages will remain visible until the associated fault has been rectified.
These messages cannot be hidden. Should several faults occur simultaneously, the Check
Control messages will be displayed consecutively.
Other Check Control messages disappear automatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they remain memorised.
Displaying memorised Check Control messages
Via the CHECK button
1.
Press and hold down the button:
The first message stored is displayed.
You can subsequently call up additional information for most Check Control messages, e.g. the cause of a malfunction and what action is
required on your part, see Displaying further information subsequently, page 78 .
In urgent cases, this information will be shown when the corresponding light comes on.
At the same time an acoustic signal sounds.
To exit the menu:
Arrow is selected. Press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
2.
Briefly press the button:
Every time you press the button, another message is displayed.
Displaying further information subsequently
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
Press the button on the flashing turn indicator lever.
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "CHECK" and press the controller.
Even if the ignition is switched off and the display has gone out, you can call up the messages on the info display.
Press the CHECK button, see page 78 , for
approx. 8 seconds. The stored messages are displayed again. If there are several messages, briefly press the CHECK button as many times as necessary.
The Check Control is closed:
> Automatically after a short time
> If you press the CHECK button again for approx. 8 seconds
The stored messages are displayed.
4.
Select a text message and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Arrow is selected. Press the controller.
Displaying the urgency of malfunctions
Depending on the status of the systems being monitored, the symbol in the status line appears in different colours.
Yellow or red
There are malfunctions in the systems monitored. Depending on the severity of the malfunction, supplementary information will be displayed on the control display.
The symbol also shows the status of the service
requirements, see Symbols on page 76
.
Messages displayed at the end of a journey
Malfunctions which have been indicated during a journey are displayed again when you switch off the ignition.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed at which you are to be alerted by means of a Check Control message.
You can use this feature e.g. to ensure that you do not exceed the speed limit in a built-up area.
A renewed reminder of this speed limit will not be given unless you have undercut it by at least
5 km/h, approx. 3 mph, in the meantime.
Displaying, setting or altering limit
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select "Limit" and press the controller.
4.
Select "SET" and press the controller.
5.
Turn the controller to adjust the limit.
6.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Memorising actual speed as limit value
Select and press the controller.
The actual speed is memorised as the limit value.
Activating/deactivating the speed limit
Select "ON / OFF" and press the controller.
When the speed limit is active, then "ON / OFF" is marked.
Limit on the info display
4.
Select and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset to 0 and started.
If for example the advance warning field of the
revolution counter is active, see page 72 , the
speed limit is indicated in the speedometer by means of a warning field, see arrow.
5.
Select and press the controller. Timekeeping is stopped.
Press the controller anew to reset the stopwatch to 0.
You can also call up other functions at any time while the stopwatch is running. The stopwatch continues to run in the background.
<
Taking an interim time reading
Select "INTERM. TIME" and press the controller. The intermediate reading is displayed below the current time display.
Stopwatch
Starting and stopping
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select and press the controller.
Assistance window* for on-board data
You can have the following computer functions displayed in the assistance window:
> Computer
> Journey computer
> Speed limit
> Stopwatch
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Transferring a display
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select "BC" and press the controller.
4.
Select " Split" and press the controller.
The function is displayed in the assistance window.
You can choose between short help texts on
the selected menu items, see page 19
, or have the route displayed on vehicles with navigation system, see page
Setting language
You can set the language of the display texts.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Language" and press the controller.
Settings on the control display
Altering units of measurement and forms of expression
You can select the units of measurement for fuel consumption, distance and temperature, and the way the time and date are expressed.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Units" and press the controller.
4.
Select the desired language and activate it.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Date and time
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Clock" and press the controller.
4.
Select the menu item to be adjusted. Press repeatedly to view the options.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Setting time
1.
Select "Time" and press the controller. The first input for the time setting is activated.
2.
Turn to make the adjustment.
3.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next part of the setting is selected.
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Complete the setting. Once the setting has been completed, the time is memorised.
Setting date
1.
Select "Date" and press the controller. The first input for the date display is activated.
2.
Turn to make the adjustment.
3.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next part of the setting is selected.
4.
Complete the setting. Once the setting has been completed, the date is memorised.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Switching on hour signal
Shortly before the hour, four signal tones will be emitted.
Select "Memo" and press the controller.
Symbol as display of the menus switched on.
Adjusting brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Monitor" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Brightness" and press the controller.
In unfavourable conditions, e.g. very bright light, you may not be able to see the brightness adjustment scale.
<
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
5.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is achieved, then press the controller to apply the settings.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical features for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The principle
PDC assists you when manoeuvring into a parking space. Audible signals and a visual display indicate that you are approaching an object in front of or behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper measure the distance from it. The range of these sensors is approx.
2 m, approx. 7 ft. However, for the front sensors and those in both rear corners, an audible warning will not sound until a range of approx. 60 cm, approx. 2 ft, and approx. 1.50 m, approx. 5 ft, for the centre rear sensors.
PDC is a parking aid which is capable of registering objects approached at low speed, as is usually the case when the car is being parked. Avoid approaching an object rapidly, otherwise the system may be unable to alert you in sufficient time in view of the physical principles involved.
<
If the car is towing a trailer, the rear sensors clearly cannot supply sensible signals and therefore remain switched off.
Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated automatically after approx. 1 second when you move the selector lever to position R.
Wait briefly before starting to drive, to allow the system to become active.
Switching on manually
Press the button; the LED comes on.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Once you have driven approx. 50 m, approx.
165 ft, or travelled at a speed of more than approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph the system is deactivated and the LED goes out. Switch the system on again as necessary.
Audible warning signals
The fact that you are approaching an object is indicated by an intermittent warning signal for the part of the car in question. For instance, if an object is identified to the rear left of the car, the warning signal sounds at the rear left loudspeaker. The closer the car approaches the obstruction, the more rapid the sequence of signals. When the distance from a detected object is less than approx. 30 cm, approx. 12 in, the signal becomes continuous.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> If you remain in front of an object that was detected by only one of the corner sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the info display. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
As a precautionary measure, keep the sensors clean and free from ice, so that they always operate reliably. Do not spray for any length of time with high-pressure cleaning equipment, and keep cleaning jets at least 10 cm, approx.
4 in, away from the sensors.
PDC with optical warning
You can have the fact that you are approaching an object indicated on the control display.
Objects that are further away from the car will appear on the control display before an audible warning signal is given.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Car" and press the controller.
4.
Select "PDC pic." and press the controller.
The PDC image is activated.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
System limits
PDC is no substitute for your personal assessment of obstructions. The sensors have certain dead areas in which objects cannot always be detected. In addition, the identification of objects may not be possible if the physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring principle are exceeded, for instance in the case of trailer tow hitches and towbars, and also other thin or wedge-shaped objects. Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a continuous audible signal is given. Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.
<
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
Driving stability control systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.
Anti-lock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied. The vehicle can consequently still be steered even when the brakes are applied hard. This increases active driving safety.
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is
started. Safe braking, see page 125
.
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cornering Brake Control CBC
When the brakes are applied while cornering or when changing lanes, the vehicle's stability and steering characteristics are further enhanced.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
The system regulates the braking pressure on the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking behaviour.
Brake assist
If the brake is pressed down rapidly, this system automatically boosts the braking force to a maximum and thus helps to keep the braking distance as short as possible when a full brake application is made. It also makes full use of the advantages offered by ABS.
Maintain pressure on the brake during the entire brake application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system is also able to detect unstable driving conditions such as the breakaway of the vehicle's tail or the pushing of the vehicle over the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a safe course by reducing the engine power and by braking interventions on individual wheels within the physical limits.
Not even DSC can overcome the laws of physics. It is therefore the driver's responsibility to adopt a suitable driving style in every situation. Do not undermine the additional safety afforded by this system by taking driving risks; to do so will risk an accident.
<
Deactivating DSC
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "DTC" and press the controller at least for 3 seconds.
The LED next to "DTC" and the indicator light for DSC on the info display light up. Dynamic
Traction Control DTC and DSC are deactivated together. Stabilising and propulsive interventions are no longer executed.
To support the driving stability, activate DSC as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Select "DTC" anew and press the controller.
The LED on the control display and the DSC indicator light on the info display go out.
For checking
If the indicator light is flashing:
DSC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces.
If the indicator light is on:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a propulsion-optimised variant of the
DSC for special road conditions, e.g. snow-covered road surfaces. The system ensures maximum propulsion there, however, with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive accordingly carefully.
In the following exceptional situations it may be best to activate DTC for a short time:
> When driving on snow-covered slopes, in slush or on snow-covered roads
> When driving to-and-fro from deep snow or on loose earth
> When driving with snow chains
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Activating DTC
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "DTC" and press the controller.
The system is ready to operate each time the engine is started.
Malfunction
The warning light comes on and a message appears on the info display. The system is faulty. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
If there is a malfunction, reduce your speed accordingly, particularly on bends.
The suspension will be noticeably softer and the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt during cornering and in crosswinds.
<
If you are alerted to a loss of oil by a Check Control message, pull over as soon as possible at a suitable place and switch off the engine. Do not drive the car any further; contact BMW Service instead.
The LED next to "DTC" and the indicator light for DTC on the info display light up.
For checking
If the indicator light is flashing:
DTC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces.
If the indicator light is on:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Select "DTC" anew and press the controller.
The LED on the control display and the DTC indicator light on the info display go out.
Dynamic Drive*
The principle
Dynamic Drive minimises side tilt of your car and optimises dynamic stability when cornering or taking evasive action.
Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilisers on the front and rear axles. Depending on the driving situation, the suspension response is sporty when cornering and relaxed when driving straight ahead. The system constantly acts within a fraction of a second while the car is on the move.
Self-levelling suspension*
Malfunction
The warning light for self-levelling suspension lights up yellow and a message appears on the info display.
The self-levelling suspension has malfunctioned.
Stop the car and check it:
> The vehicle is distinctly lower at the rear than at the front, possibly just on one side, for instance at the rear left compared with the rear right.
> Ground clearance is reduced or ride comfort is noticeably poorer.
> The vehicle's ride height is normal but a fault is displayed.
Take the car to the nearest BMW Service or to a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. In doing so, drive carefully.
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Electronic Damping Control
EDC*
If parameters such as road surface quality or operating conditions such as steering, braking etc. change, the damping automatically adapts to the changed circumstances.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Car" and press the controller.
4.
Select "EDC" and press the controller.
Two programs are available.
Whenever the controller is pressed, you can change between "Comfort" and "Sports".
Comfort program
The Comfort program can be maintained across the entire road-speed range and for any vehicle load.
Sport program
The Sport program should be called up if a pronounced sports characteristic for the shock absorbers and steering is desired.
Run Flat Indicator RPA
The principle
The Run Flat Indicator monitors the pressures in the four tyres fitted to the wheels while the car is being driven. The system reports any significant loss of pressure in one tyre in relation to the others.
In the event of a loss of pressure, the operating radius and therefore the rotational speed of the wheels changes. This change is detected and reported as tyre failure.
Operating requirements
To ensure that tyre failure can be reported reliably, the system must have been initialised while the tyre pressures are correct.
The system has to be reinitialised every time tyre pressures are corrected, after each change of a wheel or tyre, and after a trailer has been attached or detached.
<
System limits
The Run Flat Indicator is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tyre damage caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tyres over a lengthy period of time.
<
In the following situations, the system could be slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
> If the system has not been initialised.
> When driving on snow-covered or slippery surfaces.
> Sporty style of driving: causing the driven wheels to spin, high lateral acceleration.
> When driving with snow chains * .
Initialising the system
Initialising is completed by driving the car; this process can be interrupted at any time. Initialising resumes automatically when you continue your journey. Do not initialise the system while driving with snow chains * fitted.
<
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Select "Settings".
2.
Select "Car" and press the controller.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "Flat Tyre Monitor" and press the controller.
The initialising menu is displayed.
4.
Start the engine but do not drive off yet.
5.
Select "Confirm tyre pressure" and press the controller.
During the initialisation you will be shown
"Reset will be completed while driving. A tire pressure loss cannot be detected while resetting. Status: activation phase...".
6.
Drive off.
At least 10 minutes will elapse before the
Run Flat Indicator is able to identify and report a flat tyre.
Initialising is completed during the journey.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Indication of a flat tyre
The warning light comes on red and a message appears on the info display.
An acoustic signal also sounds. There is a puncture or the tyre pressure has fallen substantially.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop the car carefully. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres.
2.
Identify the damaged tyre.
If you are unable to identify where the problem lies, contact BMW Service.
<
3.
Change the wheel with the damaged tyre, see Wheel-changing on page
Run-flat tyres*
1.
Carefully reduce your speed to below
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres and do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.
If the vehicle is not provided with run-
, then the vehicle cannot drive further, otherwise if you continue driving with a puncture it can lead to severe accidents.
<
2.
As soon as you get an opportunity, check tyre pressure in all four tyres.
If the tyre pressure in all four tyres is correct, the Run Flat Indicator may not have been initialised. Initialise the system.
<
3.
If the tyre is completely deflated or if there is clear evidence of damage to the tyre, you can estimate how far you will be able to drive using the following guidelines:
> With low loads:
1 to 2 persons, without luggage:
Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles.
> With moderate loads:
2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 persons without luggage:
Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles.
> With full load:
4 or more persons, luggage area full:
Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles.
Drive with caution and do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. If there is a loss of tyre pressure, the vehicle's handling properties will change. These include reduced track stability during braking, longer
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
braking distances and altered self-steering properties.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tyre has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over at a suitable location as soon as possible. Otherwise, parts of the tyre could come loose, which could result in an accident. Do not drive the car any further; contact
BMW Service instead.
<
Malfunction
The warning light comes on yellow and a message appears on the info display.
The Run Flat Indicator has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Two-stage brake lights*
Left: normal braking.
Right: hard braking.
Airbags
There are the following airbags beneath the covers indicated:
1 Front airbags
2 Head-level airbags
3 Side airbags
Protective effect
Comply with the notes on page 41 , or
there may be a risk to your personal safety.
<
The front airbags protect the driver and front passenger in the event of a head-on collision, if the protective action of the seat belts alone would be insufficient. The head-level and side airbags provide protection in the event of a side-on collision. The side airbag has the effect of supporting the upper body from the side. The head-level airbag supports the head of the seat's occupant.
The airbags will purposely not be activated by every collision, e.g. in more minor accidents and rear-end collisions.
Never attach any material to the airbag covers with adhesive, place material over them or modify them in any way.
Do not dismantle the airbag occupant restraint system. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, doors and roof posts as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not remove the steering wheel.
Avoid touching the system's components immediately after it has been triggered, as there is a risk of sustaining burns. If the airbag occupant restraint system develops a fault, is shut
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
down out of use or has been activated, have it checked, repaired or dismantled and the airbag generators scrapped only by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel and the necessary permits for handling explosive devices. Unskilled interference with the system could lead to its failure or to accidental triggering with the risk of injury.
Operational status of airbag system
range. Warm objects appear light, and cold objects dark. The camera detects objects by the temperature difference between objects and their background, as well as by the heat radiated by the object itself. It is therefore entirely possible that persons will not be fully identifiable as persons because the radiation of heat by their body is influenced by different clothes on different parts of their body.
Objects with a lower temperature difference compared with their surroundings or radiating less heat are fundamentally more difficult to identify.
System limits
From radio readiness onwards, the warning light comes on for a short time to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system faulty
> The warning light does not come on following radio readiness.
> The warning light is on permanently.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, as there is otherwise the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.
<
BMW Night Vision*
The principle
BMW Night Vision is a night vision system that can assist you when driving in the dark.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the control display.
This image is a thermal image, i.e. it shows the heat radiated by objects within the camera's
The system operates less effectively in situations such as the following:
> On steep crests or dips and on tight bends
> In tunnels, as the system is able to detect less contrast there
> If the camera is contaminated
> In thick fog and heavy rain or snow. These may reduce the contrast and cause the brightness of the image to fluctuate.
BMW Night Vision is no substitute for your personal assessment of the visibility conditions and traffic situation. Always base your responses on what you can actually see in front of you and adjust your speed in line with the actual visibility conditions, to avoid safety risks.
<
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Activating BMW Night Vision
1.
Turn the light switch to switch position 2 or 3
2.
When the low-beam headlights are switched on:
> Press the button.
> Press the button on the steering wheel.
Programming the button on the steering wheel, see page
.
Deactivating BMW Night Vision
> Press the button.
> Press the button.
> Press the button.
Adjusting settings
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Activate BMW Night Vision.
2.
Press the controller to display the menu items.
The image captured by the camera appears on the control display. Remember that this image is not the same as a video picture.
Due to the system's operating principle, a still image is intermittently displayed for a fraction of a second.
For safety reasons, the image will only be displayed at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h, approx. 3 mph, and low surrounding brightness if the low-beam headlights are switched on.
BMW Night Vision is not available for the rear screen. If the system is active, the navigation system and BMW Assist cannot be called up on the rear screen.
<
3.
Select a menu item and press the controller:
> "Zoom":
The image can be enlarged at and above a speed of approx. 70 km/h, approx.
45 mph.
> "Cornering mode":
The range scanned by the camera follows the line of the road to a certain extent, on the basis of steering angle and other parameters.
> "Full screen":
The image fills the whole control display.
> "Contrast":
The screen's contrast can be adjusted, see page
> "Brightness":
The screen's brightness can be
.
The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller or wait for a few moments.
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cleaning the camera
Heavy rain, dirt, snow and ice may impair the function of the camera.
To prevent the camera from becoming iced up, it is heated automatically at low outside temperatures.
The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlights, see page
In highly adverse conditions, it may be necessary to clean the camera manually. Take particular care when removing snow and ice.
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lights
Side lights/low-beam headlights
1 Side lights
2 Low-beam headlights and daytime driving lights *
3 Automatic driving lights control * , daytime driving lights * , Adaptive Head Light * and high-beam headlights assistant *
If you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting will go out automatically if the light switch is in position 2 or 3 .
Side lights
When the switch is in position 1 the lights are on all round the car. You can use the side lights for parking.
The side lights will drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for too long, otherwise the engine may fail to start. It is preferable to switch on the right or left parking lights, see page
.
<
Low-beam – dipped – headlights
The low-beam headlights come on when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is switched on.
Automatic driving lights control*
When the switch is in position 3 , the low-beam headlights are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, twilight, and when it is raining.
When the low-beam headlights are on, the LED next to the symbol is lit.
The headlights may also switch on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low-beam headlights will remain on regardless of the ambient light conditions if you switch on the fog lights or if the daytime driving lights are on.
<
The driving lights control function is no substitute for your individual judgement of when it is necessary to switch on the lights.
The sensors are unable, for instance, to recognise fog or hazy weather. In such situations, switch on the lights manually to avoid any safety risk.
<
Headlight courtesy delay feature
If you activate the headlight flasher after parking the car, with the lights switched off, the lowbeam headlights come on for approx.
40 seconds.
Press the button on the remote control, see page
31 . The low-beam headlights likewise
come on for approx. 40 seconds. The doorhandle and interior light also come on for approx. 10 seconds.
Daytime driving lights*
The daytime driving lights will come on when the switch is in position 2 or 3 .
Adaptive Head Light*
The principle
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight control system that makes it possible to illuminate the road surface responsively. The light cones from the headlights are directed to suit the road ahead on the basis of steering angle and other parameters.
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Activating Adaptive Head Light
In switch position 3 , Adaptive Head Light is active and automatic driving lights control is switched on.
To avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehicles, Adaptive Head Light is not active when the car is reversing and directs the light only to the front passenger's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Malfunction
If the LED above the symbol for automatic driving lights control is flashing, Adaptive Head
Light is faulty or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High-beam headlights/ parking lights
High-beam headlights assistant*
The principle
This system switches the high-beam headlights on and off automatically. This process is controlled by a sensor on the front of the inside mirror. The assistant ensures that the highbeam headlights are switched on whenever permitted by the situation in which the car is being driven. This relieves the load on you the driver and optimises your view of the road. You can of course intervene at any time and switch the high-beam headlights on and off in the usual way.
Activating the high-beam headlights assistant
1.
Turn the light switch to switch position 3 , see page 93 .
2.
With the low-beam headlights switched on, briefly press the flashing turn indicator lever towards high-beam headlights.
1 High-beam headlights
2 Headlight flasher
3 Parking lights
Right or left parking lights*
There is an additional option of switching on the lights on the side of the car facing the road when parked:
Once you have switched the engine off, push the lever beyond the pressure point in the corresponding direction 3 .
The parking lights will drain the battery.
Do not leave them switched on for too long, otherwise the engine may fail to start.
<
The indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on when the high-beam headlights assistant is active. The lights are raised and dipped automatically as the system responds to traffic travelling in front and in the oncoming direction, and also when ambient lighting is sufficient, e.g. in built-up areas.
Raising and dipping manually
You can intervene at any time as required or if required by the situation:
> If the high-beam headlights assistant has switched on the high-beam headlights but you would prefer the low-beam headlights
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
to be switched on, simply use the flashing turn indicator lever to dip the headlights.
This will deactivate the high-beam headlights assistant.
To reactivate the system, press the flashing turn indicator lever again briefly towards high-beam headlights.
> If the high-beam headlights assistant has switched on the low-beam headlights but you would prefer the high-beam headlights to be switched on, raise the lights in the usual way. This deactivates the system and you will have to dip the headlights by hand.
To reactivate the system, press the flashing turn indicator lever again briefly towards high-beam headlights.
> You can use the headlight flasher in the usual way when the headlights are dipped.
System limits
You should always give priority to your own judgement over that of the highbeam headlights assistant in respect of the use of high-beam headlights. In such situations you should dip the headlights manually in order not to create a safety hazard.
<
In the following specimen situations, the system will not operate or its operation will be subject to restrictions and your intervention may be required:
> In extremely unfavourable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy rain.
> In order to be able to perceive poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horses and riders, carts, in situations where trains or ships are travelling in the vicinity of the road, wild animals such as deer crossing.
> On narrow bends, steep uphill or downhill gradients, at traffic junctions or if your view of oncoming traffic on a motorway is obstructed.
> In poorly lit towns and where there are very reflective signs.
> At low road speeds.
> If the windscreen in the area in front of the inside mirror is dirty or is covered with stickers, labels, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Use a cloth soaked in glass cleaner to clean the sensor on the front of the inside mirror.
Fog lights
1 Front fog lights *
2 Rear fog lights *
To switch on/off, briefly press the respective button.
Front fog lights*
The side lights or low-beam headlights must be switched on. The green indicator light on the info display comes on when the front fog lights are switched on.
If automatic driving lights control has been activated, the low-beam headlights come on automatically when the front fog lights are switched on.
<
Rear fog lights*
The low-beam headlights or front fog lights must be switched on. The yellow indicator light on the info display comes on when the rear fog lights are switched on.
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Instrument lighting
The interior light comes on briefly whenever you switch on the auxiliary heater or independent ventilation control with the remote control or use the independent air conditioning.
This serves as confirmation that the desired system has been switched on.
<
Reading lights
You can set the lighting intensity with the knurled wheel.
Interior light
The interior light, the footwell lights, the door entry lighting, the ground lights and the luggage compartment lights are controlled automatically.
Switching interior light on and off manually
There are reading lights at the front and rear next to the interior light. They can be switched on and off using the buttons beside them.
To protect the battery, all lights inside the car are switched off approx. 15 minutes after the ignition has been switched off.
<
Press the button briefly.
To switch the interior light, footwell lights, door entry lighting and ground lights off permanently, press and hold down the button for approx. 3 seconds.
To cancel this mode, press the button.
The button for the interior light at the rear operates only this light.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
Versions
There are two versions of the automatic air conditioning, depending on the equipment fitted to your car.
1 Automatic air conditioning
2 Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features
Air outlets
3 Air to windscreen and side windows
4 Air to the upper body area
The central knurled wheels regulate the air volume continuously and alter the direction of airflow, as do the lower knurled wheels.
For further details of draught-free ventilation, see page
5 Air to footwells
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Automatic air conditioning
1 AUTO program, see further below
2 Ambient air/Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC/recirculated air
3
Defrosting windows and removing mist 99
4 Temperature, left-hand side of interior
5 Maximum cooling effect
6
7 Temperature, right-hand side of interior
8 Residual heat utilisation
9 Heated rear window
10 Switching cooling function on/off
11 Switching off automatic air
12 Air inlet grille for interior temperature sensor, keep unobstructed
13 Independent ventilation control/auxiliary
> Lit: switch-on time activated
> Flashing: independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater switched on
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the control display, see page 100
.
Preferred interior climate
The AUTO program 1 establishes the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions. Select the interior temperature you find the most agreeable.
The following instructions inform you in detail how to adjust the settings.
The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.
AUTO program
The AUTO program takes charge of setting the air distribution to the windscreen and side windows, to the upper body and to the footwell, as well as the air volume. It in addition adapts your temperature requirements in the light of ambient seasonal influences.
The cooling function is switched on automatically in the AUTO program. A condensation sensor simultaneously regulates the program in such a way as to avoid or minimise condensation on the window surfaces.
Intensity of the AUTO program
By pressing the AUTO button repeatedly you can set the intensity of the AUTO program. The current setting will be displayed to you briefly in the lower status line of the control display when you press the button.
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
Turn the controller to select a field.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Press the controller as often as necessary, until the desired program is displayed:
> "low"
> "medium"
> "high"
Automatic Air Recirculation Control
AUC/recirculated-air mode
If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the interior of the car can be shut off. The air inside the car is then recirculated. In the AUC mode, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts it off automatically.
Three operating modes can be obtained in succession by pressing this button repeatedly:
> LEDs off: ambient air is constantly entering the car.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: the system will identify pollutants in the ambient air and shut off the ambient air supply if necessary.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ambient air supply is permanently shut off.
If the windows fog over in recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch recirculated-air mode off and, if necessary, increase the air volume.
Recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually deteriorate.
<
Defrosting windows and removing mist
Removes ice and condensation quickly from the windscreen and from the front side windows.
You should also switch the cooling function on.
Temperature control
Set the required temperature individually on the driver's side and passenger's side. Your settings appear in the status line of the control display.
The automatic air conditioning establishes this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season by using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary. The temperature is then maintained.
The automatic air conditioning does not have sufficient time to establish the set temperature when temperature settings are changed in rapid succession.
<
Selecting the highest setting will activate maximum heat output, regardless of the outside temperature. Only cool air will be output at the lowest setting.
Via iDrive
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
3.
Select the field by turning and pressing the controller.
4.
Turn the controller to adjust the temperature:
> Turning to the left, blue: cooler
> Turning to the right, red: warmer
5.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Maximum cooling effect
At outside temperatures above approx. 0 6 /32 7 , and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic air conditioning switches to the lowest temperature and operates in recirculated-air mode. Air flows at maximum volume only from the outlets for the upper body area.
You should therefore open these outlets for maximum cooling.
Air volume
Turn to vary the air volume. You can switch the automatic function for the air volume back on by pressing the AUTO button.
6.
Select the field by turning and pressing the controller.
7.
Turn the controller to adjust the air volume:
> Turn anticlockwise: reduces air volume
> Turn clockwise: increases air volume
You can also adjust the air volume via iDrive.
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
3.
Select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
8.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The condensation sensor can only be used in the AUTO program. Press the AUTO button, if you notice misty windows and wish to use the advantages of the sensor.
Adjusting air distribution manually
To satisfy your individual requirements, adjust the air distribution:
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
3.
Select "Air dist." and press the controller.
4.
Select "Air dist." and press the controller.
4.
Select "Fixed programs" and press the controller.
5.
Select "Fine tuning" and press the controller.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select the desired field and press the controller.
1 Air to windscreen and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to footwells
The condensation sensor can only be used in the AUTO program. Press the AUTO button, if you notice misty windows and wish to use the advantages of the sensor.
Residual heat
Heat stored in the engine is used to heat the car's interior, for instance when waiting outside school to collect a child.
The function can be switched on whenever the following conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off
> Engine at normal operating temperature
> Battery voltage is sufficient
> Outside temperature is below 25 6 /77 7
The LED lights up when the function is switched on.
From radio readiness onwards, you can adjust the interior temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Switching cooling function on/off manually
Air is cooled and dried when the cooling function is switched on, then reheated to suit the temperature setting. Depending on weather conditions, the windscreen may fog over momentarily when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically in the AUTO program. The interior can only be cooled when the engine is running.
Switching automatic air conditioning on and off
The air volume, the heating and the cooling function are switched off.
The automatic air conditioning can be switched on again by pressing any button, except the REST button.
Heated rear window
The rear window heater switches off automatically after a certain time. In some equipment specifications, the wires at the top function as an aerial and do not form part of the heated rear window.
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features*
1 AUTO program, left-hand side of interior compartment, see further below
2 Ambient air/Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC/recirculated air
3 Switching off automatic air conditioning
4 Temperature, left-hand side of interior
5 Maximum cooling effect
6 Air volume, left-hand side of interior
7
Defrosting windows and removing mist 105
8 Air volume, right-hand side of interior
9 Temperature, right-hand side of interior
Preferred interior climate
The AUTO program 1 establishes the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions. Select the interior temperature you find the most agreeable.
The following instructions inform you in detail how to adjust the settings.
The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.
AUTO program
The AUTO program takes charge of setting the air distribution to the windscreen and side windows, to the upper body and to the footwell, as well as the air volume. It in addition adapts your tem-
10 Residual heat utilisation
11
12 Switching cooling function on/off
13 AUTO program, right-hand side of interior compartment, see further below
14 Air inlet grille for interior temperature sensor, keep unobstructed
15 Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
> Lit: switch-on time activated
> Flashing: independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater switched on
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the control display, see page 105
.
perature requirements in the light of ambient seasonal influences.
The cooling function is switched on automatically in the AUTO program. A condensation sensor simultaneously regulates the program in such a way as to avoid or minimise condensation on the window surfaces.
Intensity of the AUTO program
By pressing the AUTO button repeatedly you can set the intensity of the AUTO program. The current setting will be displayed to you briefly in the lower status line of the control display when you press the button.
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
Select driver or front passenger side by turning the controller.
4.
Turn the controller to select a field.
5.
Press the controller as often as necessary, until the desired program is displayed:
> "low"
> "medium"
> "high"
Automatic Air Recirculation Control
AUC/recirculated-air mode
If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the interior of the car can be shut off. The air inside the car is then recirculated. In the AUC mode, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts it off automatically.
Three operating modes can be obtained in succession by pressing this button repeatedly:
> LEDs off: ambient air is constantly entering the car.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: the system will identify pollutants in the ambient air and shut off the ambient air supply if necessary.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ambient air supply is permanently shut off.
If the windows fog over in recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch recirculated-air mode off and, if necessary, increase the air volume.
Recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually deteriorate.
<
Switching automatic air conditioning on and off
The air volume, the heating and the cooling function are switched off.
The automatic air conditioning can be switched on again by pressing any button, except the REST button.
Temperature control
Set the required temperature individually on the driver's side and passenger's side. Your settings appear in the status line of the control display.
The automatic air conditioning establishes this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season by using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary. The temperature is then maintained.
The automatic air conditioning does not have sufficient time to establish the set temperature when temperature settings are changed in rapid succession.
<
Selecting the highest setting will activate maximum heat output, regardless of the outside temperature. Only cool air will be output at the lowest setting.
Via iDrive
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
3.
Select driver or front passenger side by turning the controller.
4.
Select the field by turning and pressing the controller.
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Turn the controller to adjust the temperature:
> Turning to the left, blue: cooler
> Turning to the right, red: warmer
3.
Select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
4.
Select "Air dist." and press the controller.
6.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
Maximum cooling effect
At outside temperatures above approx. 0 6 /32 7 and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic air conditioning switches to the lowest temperature and operates in recirculated-air mode. Air flows at maximum volume only from the outlets for the upper body area.
You should therefore open these outlets for maximum cooling.
Air volume
Turn to vary the air volume. You can switch the automatic function for the air volume back on by pressing the AUTO button.
5.
Select "Fine tuning" and press the controller.
6.
Select the field by turning and pressing the controller.
7.
Turn the controller to adjust the air volume:
> Turn anticlockwise: reduces air volume
> Turn clockwise: increases air volume
You can also adjust the air volume via iDrive.
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
8.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
The condensation sensor can only be used in the AUTO program. Press the AUTO button, if you notice misty windows and wish to use the advantages of the sensor.
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting air distribution manually
To satisfy your individual requirements, adjust the air distribution:
1.
Call up start menu.
2.
Call up "Climate".
3.
Select "Air dist." and press the controller.
4.
Select "Fixed programs" and press the controller.
5.
Select driver or front passenger side by turning the controller.
6.
Select the desired field and press the controller.
1 Air to windscreen and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to footwells
The condensation sensor can only be used in the AUTO program. Press the AUTO button, if you notice misty windows and wish to use the advantages of the sensor.
Defrosting windows and removing mist
Removes ice and condensation quickly from the windscreen and from the front side windows.
You should also switch the cooling function on.
Residual heat
Heat stored in the engine is used to heat the car's interior, for instance when waiting outside school to collect a child.
The function can be switched on whenever the following conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off
> Engine at normal operating temperature
> Battery voltage is sufficient
> The outside temperature is below 25 6 /
77 7
The LED lights up when the function is switched on.
From radio readiness onwards, you can adjust the interior temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Switching cooling function on/off manually
Air is cooled and dried when the cooling function is switched on, then reheated to suit the temperature setting. Depending on weather conditions, the windscreen may fog over momentarily when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically in the AUTO program. The interior can only be cooled when the engine is running.
Heated rear window
The rear window heater switches off automatically after a certain time. In some equipment specifications, the wires at the top function as an aerial and do not form part of the heated rear window.
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Ventilation at front
1 Knurled wheels for continuous opening and closing of the outlets
2 Knurled wheels for adjusting the direction of the airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the outlets so that cool air is directed towards you, e.g. if the car's interior has become hot.
Draught-free ventilation
Turn outlets so that the airflow passes the occupants without striking their bodies directly.
Rear-seat area ventilation
1 Knurled wheels for continuous opening and closing of the outlets
2 Levers for adjusting the direction of the airflow
3 Knurled wheels * for setting the temperature:
> Turned towards blue: cooler
> Turned towards red: warmer
Microfilter/activated charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated charcoal filter in addition removes gaseous pollutants from the air entering the car. This combined filter is changed during routine maintenance by BMW
Service or a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel.
You can call up further information in the Next
Service indicator, see page 76 .
1 Knurled wheel for continuous opening and closing of the outlets
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Rear air conditioning system*
You can adjust the following settings or select the following functions individually for the left and right sides:
1 Adjusting cooling effect
2 Maximum cooling effect
3 Air volume
4 Switching off
Switching on
> Select maximum cooling 2
> Press the OFF button 4
>
Via iDrive, see Switching on/off via iDrive
Adjusting cooling effect
You can adjust the desired cooling effect by turning the knob. A medium setting is recommended.
During the journey, the chosen setting is reached as quickly as possible, whatever the season, and maintained at a constant value.
Air volume
Turn to vary the air volume.
Maximum cooling effect
This program rapidly achieves the maximum cooling effect.
The system switches to recirculated-air mode and air emerges at the maximum air volume from the ventilation grilles. You should therefore open these outlets for maximum cooling.
Switching off
The system is switched off.
Press the button again to switch it back on.
Switching on/off via iDrive
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
If necessary select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
4.
Select "Extra" and press the controller.
5.
Select "Rear air condition." and press the controller.
Maximum cooling effect is activated automatically when you switch on the rear air conditioning system via iDrive.
<
To switch off, select "Rear air condition." again and press the controller.
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Rear-seat area ventilation
You can adjust the airflow direction with lever 1 .
For further notes on ventilation of the rear area, see page
Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater*
Both systems are operated via iDrive or the
.
The independent ventilation control ventilates the interior of the car and lowers its temperature as necessary.
The auxiliary heater heats the interior, and it facilitates removing snow and ice from the exterior.
Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The systems can also be switched on/ off using the remote control. They remain switched on for 30 minutes.
Since their current consumption is high, you should not run them twice in succession unless there has in the meantime been an opportunity to recharge the car's battery by driving the car.
Independent ventilation control
The remote control and preselection of a switch-on time can switch on the independent ventilation control above outside temperatures of approx. 15 6 /59 7 . In direct mode it is operational at any outside temperature, but not in driving mode.
Air emerges from the adjustable outlets for the upper body zone in the instrument panel. The outlets must therefore be open.
Auxiliary heater
The remote control and preselection of a switch-on time can switch on the auxiliary heater above outside temperatures of approx.
15 6 /59 7 . In direct mode it is operational at any outside temperature, but not in driving mode.
If you have not used the auxiliary heater for several months, you may need to switch the system on again after a few minutes in order for the auxiliary heater to start up.
<
With the ignition switched off, the heated air is automatically directed to the windscreen, side windows and footwell.
The auxiliary heater continues to run for a short time after it has been switched off.
Never run the auxiliary heater in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas from the engine can lead to loss of consciousness with fatal consequences. The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.
Switch off the auxiliary heater before refuelling the car.
<
The auxiliary heater will not come on if there is not enough fuel in the tank for at least approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles.
<
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
If necessary select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
4.
Select "Stationary" and press the controller.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select "Indep. ventil." or "Aux. heating" and press the controller.
Activating the switch-on time
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
If necessary select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
4.
Select "Stationary" and press the controller.
5.
Select "Switch. time 1" or "Switch. time 2" and press the controller.
on.
The independent ventilation control is
LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes.
6.
To switch off, select "Indep. ventil." or "Aux. heating" again and press the controller.
Preselecting the switch-on time
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
If necessary select symbol and press the controller to proceed to the other page of the menu.
4.
Select "Stationary" and press the controller.
5.
Select "Set time 1" or "Set time 2" and press the controller.
6.
Enter the desired time:
> Turn to make the adjustment.
> Press the controller to apply the setting.
The switch-on time is activated.
LED on the automatic air conditioning system is lit.
LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes when the system has cut in.
The independent ventilation control will only be switched on within the next
24 hours. After this, the time must be confirmed again.
<
Independent air conditioning*
The independent air conditioning starts the engine while the car is locked via the remote control circuit for independent functions, and activates the automatic air conditioning's
AUTO program. The temperature of the interior is lowered to approx. 22 6 /72 7 via the air volume.
The adjustable outlets for the upper body area
.
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Never run the independent air conditioning in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas from the engine can lead to loss of consciousness with fatal consequences.
The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.
<
When the engine is started, the radio and lights will come on if they were previously left switched on. This may result in unintentional noise or glare. If the light switch is in the automatic headlight control position, no lights come on.
The warning flashers operate twice to indicate that the independent air conditioning has been switched on or off, and the interior light comes on for approx. three seconds.
<
The engine is automatically switched off after reaching the maximum operating period of approx. 1 hour, and also if there is not enough fuel in the tank for at least approx.
100 km, approx. 60 miles.
<
Setting off with the independent air conditioning running
You can set off on a journey straight away while the independent air conditioning is running.
1.
Unlock the car.
2.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock. It is not necessary to do this with convenient access.
3.
Engage a drive position and drive off.
Switching off independent air conditioning
> With the car locked, with the remote control for independent functions.
> With the car unlocked, via the start/stop button or the OFF button for the automatic air conditioning.
Remote control for independent functions*
There are two versions, depending on the equipment fitted to your car.
You can switch the following functions on and off with the remote control:
> The independent ventilation control, if the outside temperature is above approx.
15 6 /59 7 .
> The auxiliary heater, if the outside temperature is below approx. 15 6 /59 7 .
> The independent air conditioning.
The average reception range is approx. 150 m, approx. 500 ft.
You can optimise the reception range by holding the remote control as high in the air as possible with the aerial pointing upwards.
When switching on and off, do not touch the aerial or point it at the car.
<
Auxiliary heater or independent air conditioning
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Activating the system
4 LED: comes on for approx. 5 seconds when the system is activated
5 LED: flashes briefly to confirm a switch-on request
6 Aerial
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Switching on/off
1.
Press button 3 until the LED 4 comes on.
2.
Press the required button within approx.
5 seconds:
> To switch on, button 1
> To switch off, button 2
The LED 5 flashes rapidly for approx. 2 seconds to confirm the switch-on/off request. LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes.
Auxiliary heater and independent air conditioning
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Activating the system and selecting a function
> Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
> Independent air conditioning
4 LED for independent ventilation control/ auxiliary heater: comes on for approx.
5 seconds when the function is selected
5 LED for independent air conditioning: comes on for approx. 5 seconds when the function is selected
6 LED: flashes briefly to confirm a switch-on request
7 Aerial
Switching on independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
1.
Press button 3 until the LED 4 comes on.
2.
Within approx. 5 seconds, press button 1 .
The LED 6 flashes rapidly for approx.
2 seconds to confirm the switch-on request. LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes.
Switching on independent air conditioning
1.
Press button 3 until the LED 4 comes on.
Press button 3 again; the LED 5 comes on.
2.
Within approx. 5 seconds, press button 1 .
The LED 6 flashes rapidly for approx.
2 seconds to confirm the switch-on request. LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes.
Switching off
1.
Press button 3 until LEDs 4 or 5 come on.
2.
Within approx. 5 seconds, press button 2 .
The LED 6 flashes rapidly for approx.
2 seconds to confirm the switch-off request. LED on the automatic air conditioning system flashes.
Interference
The remote control may fail to function properly if there is interference from other equipment or devices which use the same radio frequency.
Changing the battery
Change the battery if the LED no longer comes on or flashes when the systems are switched on.
1.
Press in the catch, arrow 1 .
2.
Remove the cover for the battery compartment, arrow 2 .
3.
Insert a new battery of the same type. The battery's installed position is marked on the base of the battery compartment.
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Press the cover back into position.
Dispose of the old battery only at an authorised collecting point or hand it in to
BMW Service.
<
New remote control
If you would like to start using a new remote control as a second remote control or if you have lost your remote control, BMW Service will gladly initialise it for you.
You can use two remote controls for your car.
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior equipment
Integrated universal remote control*
The principle
The integrated universal remote control replaces up to three different hand-held transmitters for various systems or devices that are operated by radio remote control, for example a garage door or gate opener or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control identifies and learns the signals transmitted by the original hand-held transmitters.
The signal from an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed to one of the three memory buttons 1 . After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. Transmission of the signal is shown by the LED 2 .
If and when you decide to sell your car, in the interests of security clear the programmed functions first, see page 114 .
During the programming operation and before a programmed system is operated with the integrated universal remote control, make sure that no persons, animals or objects are within the pivoting or movement range of the system in question, otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original handheld transmitter.
<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the pack or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.
A list of compatible hand-held transmitters can be found on the Internet at www.homelink.com.
You can also call the toll-free HomeLink Hotline under +49 (0)6838 907 277 or 0800 0466
35465 within Germany.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
1.
Switch on the ignition, see page 55 .
2.
When using for the first time: press and hold down the left-hand and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds, until the
LED 2 starts to flash rapidly. All stored programs are deleted.
3.
Point the original hand-held transmitter at the memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx. 10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and memory buttons 1 depends on the system according to which the original hand-held transmitter operates.
<
4.
Press the command button on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control at the same time. The
LED 2 initially flashes slowly. When the
LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not start to flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, adjust your distance and try again.
5.
To program additional original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the same signal as the original hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device with a running engine or a switched-on ignition.
If the device cannot be operated even after repeated programming, check whether the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To establish this, either consult the operating instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or press the programmed memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control for longer. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short while and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitter.
<
Alternating-code hand-held transmitter
To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be operated. The instructions should indicate what scope there is for synchronisation.
When programming an alternating-code handheld transmitter, the following points should in addition be noted:
Programming will be easier if another person is available to assist you.
<
1.
Park your car within the range of the radio remote control device.
2.
Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in Fixed-code hand-held transmitter.
3.
Establish the location of the button on the receiver of the device to be operated, e.g. on the drive.
4.
Press the button on the receiver of the device to be operated. Once step 4 has been performed, step 5 must be completed within approx. 30 seconds.
5.
Press programmed memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the same signal as the original hand-held transmitter.
If you have any queries in this regard, please contact BMW Service or a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel.
<
Deleting stored programs
Press and hold down the left-hand and righthand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds, until the LED 2 starts to flash rapidly.
All stored programs are deleted.
It is not possible to clear programs individually.
Roller sun blinds*
Roller sun blind for rear window
From radio readiness onwards, briefly press the button on the driver's door to operate.
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Roller sun blinds for rear side windows
Glove box
Opening
1 Roller sun blind for triangular window
2 Roller sun blind for side window
3 Roller sun blind for rear window
4 Changeover switch for other side
Briefly press the corresponding button from radio readiness onwards.
The roller sun blind for the side window can only be raised when the side window is closed. If the side window is open, the roller sun blind is raised only a short distance, then lowered again.
<
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the roller sun blinds is unobstructed.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door, see page
. The LED must light up. This prevents the roller sun blinds from being operated at the switches in the rear seat area, for instance by children.
When leaving the car, take the remote control out of the ignition lock and close the doors, otherwise children could operate the roller sun blinds and possibly injure themselves.
<
Extending or retracting roller sun blinds automatically
You can raise or lower the roller sun blinds together by holding button 3 pressed.
Press the button. The glove box opens automatically and the light comes on.
Closing
Swing the lid up.
After using the glove box while the car is moving, close its lid without delay, so that it cannot cause injury in the event of an accident.
<
Rechargeable hand lamp
This is inside the glove box, on the left.
The lamp can remain permanently plugged in.
Pull the lamp out of its holder whenever it is needed.
Make sure that the lamp is switched off before inserting it in the holder, otherwise damage could occur due to overcharging.
<
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Centre armrest, front
There is a storage compartment in the centre armrest between the front seats. Briefly press the buttons to open it.
1 Opens the right-hand lid
2 Opens the left-hand lid
The mat in the compartment can be removed for cleaning.
Depending on version, the storage compartment may contain the following equipment:
> Removable CD rack *
> Fold-out, removable compartment eyewear or mobile phone
* , e.g. for
> Fold-out, removable waste receptacle *
Locking storage compartment
Ventilating the storage compartment
The outlet can be opened and closed at the knurled wheel in the storage compartment.
The temperature inside the storage compartment may become quite high, depending on the automatic air conditioning settings. Close the outlet if necessary.
<
Automatic air conditioning:
The temperature in the storage compartment depends on the setting for the upper body area, see page
.
Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features:
The temperature in the storage compartment depends on the settings of the knurled wheels at the rear, see page
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, see
.
Centre armrest, rear
You can lock the storage compartment in the armrest with the key.
You may wish to lock the luggage compartment lid separately, e.g. at a hotel, see page
33 . If you now lock the storage com-
partment and hand over only the remote control without the key to hotel personnel, see page
28 , this prevents unauthorised access to
the storage compartment and luggage compartment.
<
Before folding down the armrest, move the head restraint to the lowest position, see page
.
<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button in the recessed handle and fold open the lid.
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Comfort seat at rear* Eyewear compartment
Before folding down the armrest, move the head restraint to the lowest position, see page
.
<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button and fold open the lid.
Briefly press the button to open it.
You can remove the insert for cleaning.
Storage compartment in the centre console
Storage compartments
Coat hooks
There are coat hooks on the grab handles in the rear seating area.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not hang any heavy objects from the hooks, as even heavy braking or sudden swerving could be sufficient to endanger the car's occupants.
<
Storage compartment on centre console
Briefly press the button to open it.
Drinks holders*
Front
To open, slide back at the recess in the lid.
Beneath the sliding covers.
Do not place glassware in the drinks holders, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.
<
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Rear
On cars with non-smoker package, the insert is removed in the same way.
Cigarette lighter, front*
On the front edge of the rear bench seat, near the centre seat.
Press briefly to open; push back in to close.
Front ashtray*
Opening
Slide the cover forward by its recess.
To extinguish a cigarette, knock off the ash and insert a short distance only into the funnelshaped hole.
Emptying
Press in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be removed when it pops back out.
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.
The cigarette lighter will still work even if the remote control has been removed from the ignition lock. To avoid the risk of injury, children should therefore not be left unattended in the car.
<
Power socket
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a power socket for a 12 V torch or car vacuum cleaner etc. rated at up to approx. 200 W. Make sure that the socket is not damaged by attempting to insert plugs of different shapes or sizes.
The socket is fitted with a detachable cap in conjunction with the non-smoker package.
When the ignition is switched off, the power supply to the socket is interrupted after approx. 1 hour.
<
Press the button, see arrow. The ashtray will pop up and can now be removed.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Rear ashtray*
Emptying
Switching on/off
Press the entire lid down. The ashtray will pop up and can now be removed.
Cigarette lighter, rear*
See Cigarette lighter, front.
Rear cool box*
The rear cool box is located behind the centre armrest on the rear seat.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the button.
The LED in the button comes on.
3.
Press the button again to switch off the rear cool box.
The rear cool box is also switched off along with the ignition.
If the battery voltage is running low, the cool box will be switched off automatically to protect the battery. The LED in the button flashes.
High temperatures in the luggage compartment can influence the temperature in the rear cool box.
<
With rear air conditioning
The rear cool box, when switched on, is governed by the rear air conditioning.
Adjusting the cooling effect and increasing the
.
Without rear air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning:
The rear cool box, when switched on, is governed by the automatic air conditioning.
Adjusting the temperature and increasing the air volume, see pages
.
Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features:
The rear cool box, when switched on, is governed by the automatic air conditioning with extended range of features.
Adjusting the temperature and increasing the air volume, see pages
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening Loading
1.
In the rear seat back, fold the middle armrest downwards.
2.
Hold the grip and pull to open the lid.
Pull the opener and fold the cool box out forwards.
Switching on/off via iDrive*
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Climate".
3.
Select "Extra" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Rear cool box" and press the controller.
3.
Remove the cover * and place it on the rear controller.
4.
Open the loading flap in the luggage compartment:
Press the handle and push to the right.
Select "Rear cool box" again and press the controller to switch off.
Ski bag*
This enables up to four pairs of standard skis or up to two snowboards to be carried safely and kept clean.
You can stow skis up to a length of 2.10 m, approx. 7 ft, with the aid of the ski bag. If skis of this length are carried, however, the capacity of the ski bag is lower in view of its tapered design.
5.
Lay out the ski bag between the front seats and fill it. The zip fastener provides better access to the objects stowed in the bag and facilitates better drying of the ski bag.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap protective material around any sharp edges to avoid causing damage.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Securing the load
After loading the ski bag, secure the bag and its contents by tightening the retaining strap at its turnbuckle.
Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise even heavy braking or sudden swerving could be sufficient to endanger the car's occupants.
<
Stowing away the ski bag
1.
Close the loading flap in the luggage compartment:
Press the handle and push to the left.
2.
Fold up the ski bag and place it in the compartment.
Luggage compartment
Net*
Small objects can be stored in the net on the partition in the luggage compartment.
Do not store small objects behind the side trims on either side of the luggage compartment, otherwise the electrical components could overheat and incur damage.
<
3.
Engage the cover as illustrated.
4.
Close the lid.
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
The driving hints chapter provides the information that you may require in particular driving situations or operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving precautions
Running in
Moving parts need a certain time to achieve maximum operating efficiency as a unit. Please comply with the following instructions, which are intended to ensure that your car achieves its optimum operating life and economy.
Engine and final drive
Observe the national speed limits in the country in which you are travelling.
Up to 2000 km, approx. 1200 miles
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed the following values:
> Petrol engine
4500 rpm, or 160 km/h, approx. 100 mph
> Diesel engine
3500 rpm, or 150 km/h, approx. 90 mph
Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic transmission kick-down.
From 2000 km, approx. 1200 miles, onwards
Engine and road speeds can be gradually increased.
Tyres
New tyres do not achieve their full road grip immediately, for production reasons. You should therefore drive in a restrained manner for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.
Brake system
Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favourable wear and contact pattern until the car has covered approx. 500 km, approx. 300 miles.
After fitting new parts
The same running in procedures should be observed if any of the components listed above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
General driving hints
Closing luggage compartment lid
Drive only with the luggage compartment lid fully closed, otherwise exhaust gases could enter the passenger compartment.
<
If it is nevertheless necessary to travel with the luggage compartment lid open, observe the following precautions:
1.
Close all windows and the glass roof.
2.
Turn the air volume of the automatic air conditioning up significantly, see pages
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures occur in the exhaust system of all vehicles. Never remove the head shields protecting this area, nor apply underseal to them. Make sure that when the car is driven or parked and when the engine is idling, no easily flammable material such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. comes into contact with the hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a fire, with the risk of severe injuries or damage.
<
Diesel particulate filter*
The diesel particulate filter collects soot particles and burns them periodically at high temperatures. This cleaning procedure takes several minutes. In some circumstances, you may notice it by the fact that the engine temporarily runs more roughly and requires a higher engine speed for normal power development. In addition, the exhaust may cause some noise and emit a small amount of smoke, even after the engine has been switched off.
Mobile communication equipment
BMW advises against the use of mobile communication equipment such as mobile phones inside the car, unless they are directly connected to an outside aerial. Mutual interference between the vehicle's electronics
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
and such equipment cannot be entirely ruled out. There is moreover no guarantee that the radiation generated when such devices are transmitting will be dissipated out of the vehicle's interior.
<
Aquaplaning
When driving on wet or slushy surfaces, reduce speed to prevent a wedge of water from forming between the tyre and the road.
This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that the tyre can actually lose contact completely with the road surface, with the result that neither can the car be steered nor the brakes be applied properly.
<
Wading
Drive through water only to a max. depth of 30 cm, approx. 12 in, and no faster than walking pace, otherwise the engine, electrical system and transmission may be damaged.
<
Safe braking
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as standard.
Where a situation requires you to apply the brakes hard, you are advised to do so. Since the car remains steerable, you can avoid obstacles by turning the steering wheel as smoothly as possible.
The pulsating sensation at the brake pedal, combined with the sound of the hydraulic system operating, indicates that the ABS is intervening.
Wet roads
In wet conditions or heavy rain, apply the brakes briefly with slight pedal pressure every few kilometres or miles. When doing so, make sure that no other road user is endangered. The resulting heat dries the brake discs and pads. The braking force will then be available immediately if needed.
Downhill gradients
To avoid impairing the efficiency of the brake system as a result of overheating, drive down long or steep descents in the gear that allows you to keep brake applications to a minimum. Otherwise even slight continuous pressure on the brake pedal could cause overheating, brake pad wear or even brake system failure.
<
The braking effect of the engine can be boosted by shifting the gear down in the manual mode of the automatic gearbox, if necessary as far as 1st gear, see page
61 . This prevents an excessive
stress on the brakes.
Never drive in neutral or with the engine switched off; engine braking action will not be present, or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired by floor mats, carpets or other objects.
<
Corrosion of brake discs
If the car is used only for short distances, is not used for lengthy periods or is subjected to only minor loads, the brake discs will be particularly susceptible to corrosion and the brake pads will collect dirt; this is because the necessary brake pressure for a self-cleaning effect has not been generated.
When the brakes are applied, corroded discs tend to judder, and even lengthy brake applications usually fail to eliminate this effect entirely.
When vehicle is parked
Moisture condensate forms in the automatic air conditioning and is discharged underneath the car. Traces of water on the ground are therefore normal.
Before entering a car wash
1.
Fold in the outside mirrors, see page 48 , as
they could otherwise be damaged due to the car's width.
Observe the instructions on page 56
, to ensure that the car's wheels are free to roll along.
2.
Release the parking brake, particularly if you have activated Automatic Hold, see
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Rule of the road, headlight adjustment
When entering countries where the traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country in which your car is registered, certain measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehicles.
Do not make adjustments while the headlights are still hot, otherwise there is a risk of burns.
<
If you are not familiar with this type of operation, please contact BMW Service or a BMWapproved workshop with suitably trained personnel.
1.
Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
2.
Remove external covers on the rear side of the headlights; press the clips to do so, see arrow.
Loading
> Position heavy objects low down and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the luggage compartment bulkhead.
> Wrap protective material round sharp corners and edges.
> When carrying very heavy loads with no passengers on the back seat, insert each of the outer seat belts into their opposite buckles.
Securing the load
The picture shows the rear side of the right headlight. On the left headlight, the lever 1 is located on the other side.
3.
Driving on the left: press each lever 1 down.
Driving on the right: press each lever 1 up.
When crossing the border back into the car's country of registration, press each lever 1 back in the opposite direction.
Loads
Avoid overloading the car, as this could cause the tyres' load capacity limit to be exceeded. The tyres could then overheat and sustain internal damage. This could lead to sudden pressure loss.
<
> Small and relatively light items can be retained with the tensioning straps, a loadarea net * or other suitable straps.
> BMW Service can supply suitable lashings * for securing larger or heavier loads. To secure these lashings, there are four eyes in the luggage compartment, see picture.
> Please note the information supplied with load securing equipment.
Stow and secure the load as described previously, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants merely if sudden braking or avoiding action is necessary.
Do not exceed the car's permitted gross weight
or the axle load limits, see page 243
, otherwise the car's operating safety may be endangered
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
and the construction and use regulations infringed.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the interior compartment, since they could be dislodged merely by heavy braking, sudden swerving or similar, and endanger the occupants.
<
Correct, secure loading of the roof rack will prevent items from shifting or falling off during the journey.
Drive smoothly and avoid violent acceleration, braking or cornering.
Roof rack*
A special roof rack system is available as an accessory for your BMW. If it is used, please comply with the installation instructions supplied.
Mounting points
Towing a trailer
The trailer load limit is given on page
also entered in the car's registration papers.
Every BMW Service will provide information about possibilities of increasing it.
Cover flap
The mounting points are located in the door cut-outs.
Loading the roof rack
A loaded roof rack alters the car's road behaviour and steering response quite considerably, by moving its centre of gravity.
When loading the roof rack, ensure that the specified roof load limit, the car's gross weight limit and the axle loads are not exceeded.
The details for this are found under Weights on page 243
.
The roof load must be distributed evenly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items of luggage should be placed at the bottom. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for raising the glass roof and that no objects extend back far enough to be struck by the luggage compartment lid when it is opened.
Removing
Hold the cover flap for the trailer tow hitch by the recessed handle and pull off to the rear.
Fitting
Hold the cover flap up against the trim, push it in the guide and press on fully.
Trailer tow hitch*
If a trailer tow hitch is fitted by the manufacturer, the vehicle will be equipped with uprated suspension at the rear as standard.
Look after a detachable ball end in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions, to ensure that it can be fitted and removed without difficulty.
Due to the body reinforcements at the rear end of the vehicle, the effect of the regenerable bumper system is limited.
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Fitting and removing
The procedure for fitting and removing the ball hitch is described in the enclosed manufacturer's operating instructions.
Before a journey
Nose weight
The trailer's nose weight must be at least 25 kg, approx. 55 lb.
The permissible nose weight is indicated on page
The trailer's nose weight affects the towing vehicle, and must not lead to the car's gross weight limit or rear axle load limit being exceeded if a trailer is being towed. The car's payload limit is reduced by the weight of the trailer tow hitch and, if a trailer is being towed, by its nose weight. The gross weight limit for the combined car and trailer must not be exceeded.
Loads
When loading the trailer, make sure that the weight is kept as low as possible and stowed if possible close to the axle.
A low centre of trailer gravity makes the outfit much more stable and safe to drive.
Do not exceed either the trailer's permitted gross weight or the specified permitted towing load for the car. The smaller value is the limit which should be adhered to.
Tyre pressures
Check the car's and the trailer's tyre pressures most carefully. For the car, the tyre inflation pressures for trailer operation apply, see page
220 . Every time you correct the tyre pres-
sures, reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see page
87 . Comply with the manufacturer's spec-
ifications for the trailer.
Run Flat Indicator
Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after a trailer
has been attached or detached, see page 87
.
Outside mirrors
Two outside mirrors which bring both rear corners of the trailer into your field of view are required by law. Mirrors of this kind can be obtained from BMW Service.
Electrical consumers
When towing a caravan, try to avoid operating electrical equipment for too long at a time, in order to limit the drain on the car's battery.
The power output of the trailer's rear lights must not exceed the following values:
Flashing turn indicators: 42 W each side
Stop lights: 60 W each side
Brake lights: 84 W total
Rear fog lights: 42 W total
Reversing lights: 42 W total.
Before starting a journey, check that the trailer's rear lights are operating correctly.
Driving without functioning rear lights could put other road users at risk.
<
Towing a trailer
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may start to snake depending on design and load.
<
Stopping snaking
If the trailer begins to snake, the outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard immediately. Only attempt to steer out of the situation if this is absolutely essential; make any steering movements as carefully as possible.
Gradients
In the interests of safety and to avoid holding up other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients steeper than 12 Ξ . If a supplementary permit for heavier towing loads has been obtained, the limit is 8 Ξ
.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Downhill gradients
Special care must be taken when descending gradients, as a trailer is more susceptible to snaking:
Before starting to descend, always change down to the next-lower gear in the automatic transmission's manual mode, see page
, if necessary as far as 1st gear, and drive down the hill slowly.
Climatic comfort windscreen*
Use the area marked in the picture for your garage-door opener, electronic devices for toll logging, or similar.
This area does not have an infrared-reflecting coating and is clearly distinguishable from inside the car.
Pennant holder*
Remove the protective cap, insert the pennant and turn through 90 1 to lock in position.
Remove the pennant if you intend to drive at high speeds, to protect the pennant, its holder and the car against damage.
<
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Various examples of destination input illustrate how the navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Starting the navigation system *
Your navigation system can determine the precise position of your car by means of satellites and guide you reliably to any specified destination.
Removing the navigation CD/DVD
1.
Press the button.
2.
Remove the navigation CD/DVD.
Navigation CD/DVD
Installed position of navigation disc drive
Display in assistance window*
You can have route guidance displayed in the assistance window so that it remains visible even if you change to a different menu.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Navigation".
3.
Press the controller if necessary.
4.
Select "Split" and press the controller.
Behind the left side trim in the luggage compartment.
You can use navigation CDs with a production status of 2001-1 or later and navigation DVDs in your navigation computer.
To be quite certain that your car's navigation system has the latest road network information at its disposal, always load it with the most recent CD/DVD version of the digitised road map.
Navigation CDs/DVDs, like conventional road maps, are periodically updated on the basis of observations and survey data.
Navigation CDs/DVDs can be obtained from BMW Service.
<
Inserting the navigation CD/DVD
Navigation CDs/DVDs are inserted in the navigation disc drive.
1.
Insert the navigation CD/DVD with the label side uppermost.
2.
Wait for several seconds to allow the contents of the CD/DVD to be read in.
The route is shown in various modes in the assistance window during route guidance,
see Displaying route, page 147 :
> True north
> Direction of travel
> Perspective
> Arrow view
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination input
You can choose from the following options for entering a destination:
>
Entering a destination manually, see below.
> Selecting the destination from a map, see
.
> Selecting the destination via information,
.
> Selecting a recently used destination, see
.
> Selecting a destination from the address
.
> Selecting home address, see page
Once you have selected a destination, you are
ready to start route guidance, see page 146
.
Only enter data when the car is standing still, and always obey the traffic regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system.
The car's occupants and other road users could otherwise be put at risk.
<
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Navigation".
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest. " and press the controller.
3.
Select "ABC... " and press the controller.
Entering a destination manually
The wordmatch principle makes the input of place-names or streets easier. This principle enables you to enter alternative spellings and automatically completes a name that has been
recognised beyond doubt, see page 145
.
The system in addition supports you with the following special features:
> If you do not enter a street name, you will be guided to the boundary of the town or city.
> Depending on the data stored on your navigation CD/DVD, you may also be able to enter a house number for certain streets.
> You can skip input of the country, town or city if you wish to retain previous inputs.
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Destination input } .
Entering name
The name is not needed for route guidance or for memorising in the list, but it may help you to identify addresses.
1.
Select "Name" and press the controller.
2.
Turn to select the letters, then press the controller respectively.
> Enter blank spaces:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Delete last letter:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Cancel selection:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Selecting country
If the name of a country appears on the control display in white letters, data for more than one country is stored on the navigation CD/DVD.
1.
Select "Country" or the country displayed and press the controller.
The list of available countries is displayed.
2.
Select destination country and press the controller.
In order to start route guidance, at least the town/city must be entered.
Entering a destination by town or city name
1.
Select "Town/city" or the town/city displayed and press the controller.
2.
Select the initial letter and press the controller.
A list of all places starting with that letter is shown on the control display.
3.
Select the name that is displayed in the lower half of the control display and press the controller.
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Enter more letters if necessary.
The list is gradually narrowed down with every subsequent letter that you enter.
> Enter blank spaces:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Delete last letter:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Cancel selection:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and junction
Entering a street
1.
Select "Street" or the street displayed and press the controller.
2.
Entry as under Entering a destination by town or city name.
4.
Select the names of place in the list by turning and pressing the controller.
Entering a destination via postcodes*
You can enter the postcode if the navigation
CD/DVD supports this feature.
1.
Select "Town/PC" and press the controller.
2.
Entering postcode:
Select the individual characters and press the controller each time.
> Enter blank spaces:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Delete last digit or last letter:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Cancel selection:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
3.
Select postcode and press the controller.
The name of the appropriate destination is displayed.
4.
Select the names of place in the list by turning and pressing the controller.
Entering a street without entering a town/city
You can also enter a street without indicating a town/city if the navigation CD/DVD supports this feature. In this case, all streets are offered within the country indicated. The respective town or city is shown after the street name.
If a town or city has already been entered, this entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in instances where the desired street cannot be found in the indicated town or city because it belongs to a different suburb, for example.
1.
Turn the controller until the top box is selected and press the controller.
2.
Press the controller.
3.
Enter the street.
You can switch back to input of a street in the town or city indicated in the same way.
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Entering a junction
Enter the junction in the same way as the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter the house number if the navigation CD/DVD supports this feature.
1.
Select "House number" and press the controller.
2.
To enter the house number:
Select the individual characters and press the controller each time.
> Delete last digit or last letter:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Cancel selection:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the house number entered is not stored on the navigation CD/DVD, the nearest possible house number is entered.
3.
Select "Enter" and press the controller.
If route guidance cannot be started, at least one entry must be deleted from the destinations list, see page
If route guidance should not be started directly, you can store the address in the address book, see page
route guidance later.
<
Displaying information on the destination
Select the symbol and press the controller.
For further notes on the information, see
.
Starting route guidance from a manual destination input
Selecting the destination via map
If you know only the position of a place or street, you can enter the destination with the aid of a map. You can select the destination on the map by means of cross-hairs and then transfer it for route guidance:
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest." and press the controller.
Select "ROUTE GUIDE " and press the controller.
Route guidance is started immediately.
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "With map " and press the controller.
degrees longitude and latitude. A street or road name near the selected destination will be displayed.
To be able to choose this point as destination or save it in the address book as an address, you
must first enter a name, see page 134
.
A map section is displayed on the control display:
> Around the current destination during route guidance
> Around the last destination entered if route guidance is switched off
4.
Select the destination with the cross-hairs:
> Change the scale: turn the controller
> Move the map: move the controller in the corresponding direction.
The name of the street or place at the intersection of the cross-hairs is displayed as soon as the map is no longer being moved.
5.
Press the controller to display more menu items:
> "Next" switches back to "With map".
> "Location" selects the current location as map middle point.
> "Destin." selects the active or the last destination as map middle point.
> "Save destination" transfers the address in the cross-hairs in the destination entry.
Selecting the destination via information
You can call up selected destinations, e.g. hotels, tourist attractions or hospitals, and transfer them for route guidance if you choose.
"General destination" and "Travel info" are fundamentally the same, the only difference being the greater range of possible destinations available under "Travel info".
General destination
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest." and press the controller.
3.
Select "Information" and press the controller.
4.
Select "General destination" and press the controller.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a street or place, the location is displayed as
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select "On location " and press the controller.
8.
Select a destination and press the controller.
6.
Select individual categories of information, e.g. "Public buildings, Businesses and shops" and press the controller.
If you select information "On destin.",
"On country" and "On town/city", enter the destination, country and town/city as appropriate. If destinations have already been entered, this information is displayed for the destination at the top of the destinations list.
<
7.
Make other selections, e.g. industrial centres.
Symbols used:
>
>
>
Scroll upwards or downwards
Back to "Information"
Transfer the destination directly to the destinations list
>
>
Dial a phone number
Go to previous page
> Information on hotels can be displayed either as text or using symbols, e.g.:
Parking
Restaurant facilities
Swimming-pool
Credit cards accepted
Disabled facilities
On the control display the destinations are displayed by distance and with arrows indicating the direction of each destination.
When selecting information "On destin.", "On country" and "On town/city" the destinations are sorted alphabetically and displayed.
<
Children's facilities
Conference facilities
No-smoking areas or rooms
The actual range of symbols available depends on the navigation DVD in use.
<
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Information location } .
3.
Enter the desired category:
> { Hotels } .
> { Parking } .
> { Petrol stations } .
Travel information
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest." and press the controller.
3.
Select "Information" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Travel info" and press the controller.
tination. Optional inputs such as displaying
BMW partner hotels can also be made.
The nearest destinations are displayed on the control display, arranged in order of distance and according to the other criteria used.
7.
Select a destination and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding icons in map view
In map view the destinations of selected categories are displayed depending upon the map scale and category in form of icons. You can hide these.
Select "Hide icons" and press the controller.
To call up the icons, select a category again under "General destination" or "Travel info".
Various categories, such as hotels and restaurants, are displayed depending on the map DVD in use.
5.
Select the desired category and press the controller.
Last destinations
The last ten destinations entered are memorised. You can transfer these destinations to route guidance and edit the entries and lists.
Transferring the destination to route guidance
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest." and press the controller.
6.
Make further inputs to narrow down the selection, e.g. the maximum distance to the destination desired or the name of the des-
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "Last destin." and press the controller.
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Dest. list" and press the controller.
On the right side of the control display, the last reached destinations are listed.
4.
Select the desired destination and press the controller.
5.
"ROUTE GUIDE" is selected. Press the controller.
Route guidance is started.
Editing the last destinations
You can edit the last destinations in the same way as the destinations list, see Editing the destinations list on page 140 .
Destinations list
The last 25 destinations entered into the system are shown in the destinations list. The last destination entered appears at the top of the list.
You are taken to the destinations in the order in which they appear in the destinations list, starting with the destination at the top of the destinations list.
You can edit individual destinations and the order in which they appear in the list, as well as delete the destinations list, see Editing the destinations list on page 140 .
If you are planning a longer journey, for example, you can save all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destinations list in advance,
see Entering a destination manually on
page
If the list is full at least one entry must be deleted, in order to transfer a new destination to the destinations list.
<
140
Transferring the destination to route guidance
1.
Select the desired destination from the destinations list and move it to the top of the destinations list, see Editing the destinations list.
2.
Select "Route guide" and press the controller.
Route guidance is started.
Via the voice input system:
{ Route guidance on } .
Editing the destinations list
1.
Select the desired destination in the destinations list and press the controller.
2.
The selected destination can be edited:
> Change entry:
Select "CHANGE" and press the controller.
> Delete entry:
Select "DELETE" and press the controller.
> To move the address up or down the destinations list:
Select the controller.
symbols and press the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This enables you to alter the order of the destinations list.
> To switch back to "Dest. list":
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Address book for navigation system
The entries in the address book are sorted alphabetically.
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New dest." and press the controller.
3.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored addresses are displayed on the right side of the control display.
Deleting destinations list
1.
Select and press the controller to delete all current entries.
2.
Select "YES" and press controller to delete the destinations list.
Address book
You can save destinations in the address book and transfer them directly for destination guidance.
You can save the addresses in two address books that are independent of each other:
> The navigation system's address book
> The voice input system's address book
Storing destinations in the address book
You can enter the addresses manually or transfer them from the destinations list or from last destinations. Approx. 100 destinations can be saved in the address book.
1.
Entering the desired destination manually or selecting it from the destinations list:
>
Entering a destination manually:
> Selecting destination from last destinations:
> Selecting destination from the destinations list:
2.
Entering a name and address if appropriate, see page
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "AS ADDRESS" and press the controller.
Selecting destinations from address book
1.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored addresses are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select the address and press the controller.
3.
To start route guidance:
Select "ROUTE GUIDE" and press the controller.
The entry is saved in the address book.
Saving the car's location*
Your current location can be transferred to the address book.
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Location" and press the controller.
The current location can be given a name and a predetermined name edited, see page
3.
Select "AS ADDRESS" and press the controller.
The current address is saved in the address book.
You can transfer your current location to the address book even if you have left the area digitised on the navigation DVD. To do this, you have to enter a name.
Altering destinations from address book
1.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored addresses are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select the address and press the controller.
Editing an entry, see Entering a destination manually, page 133
.
Whenever an entry is edited, a copy of the entry is saved.
<
Deleting destinations from address book individually
1.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored addresses are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select the address and press the controller.
3.
Select "DELETE" and press the controller.
4.
Select "YES" and press the controller to delete the address.
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Deleting all destinations from address book
1.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored addresses are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select and press the controller to delete all current entries.
3.
Select "YES" and press the controller to delete the address book.
Home address
Saving home address
You can save your current location or the current destination as your home address in the address book.
1.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
2.
To save your current location as your home address:
> Select "LOC." and press the controller.
To save a current destination in the address book as your home address:
> Select "ACCEPT" and press the controller.
The entered address or the current location is applied as the home address.
The entry or editing of your home address occurs as the destination entry, page
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Selecting home address
You can use your home address from the address book for route guidance.
1.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
2.
Select "ROUTE GUIDE" and press the controller.
Route guidance is started.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ To home } .
Address book for voice input system
The house number is not saved in the voice input system's address book.
<
Storing destinations in the address book
The first entry in the destinations list can be stored. To store further addresses, edit the destinations list accordingly, see page
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Save destination } .
3.
Say the name you wish to give the coordinates of the destination.
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Selecting destinations from address book
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Select destination } .
3.
Say the name.
or
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Read out } .
> To browse forward: { Next } .
> To browse backward: { Back } .
> To repeat: { Repeat } .
> To transfer to the destinations list:
{ Select } .
Deleting destinations from address book
Deleting individual destinations:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Delete } .
3.
Say the name.
To delete all existing entries:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Delete address book } .
Altering route criteria
1.
Select "New route" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Route select" and press the controller.
The various criteria are displayed on the control display.
3.
Select one of the four route criteria and press the controller.
Selecting a route
You can influence the route calculated by selecting various route criteria.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g. motorways or winding routes. Details of the road types are stored on the navigation DVD.
For this reason, the route proposed by the system will not necessarily be the one the driver expects from experience.
> "Using motorway"
Motorways and arterial roads are given priority.
> "Avoid motorway"
Motorways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fastest route"
A fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads.
> "Shortest route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be.
The route criterion is selected.
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Select additional criteria for the route as appropriate and press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic congestion.
Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic congestion, the route can also be calculated such that it cuts across the traffic congestion.
> "Avoid tolls"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
The supplementary criterion is selected.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can change the route selection as often as you like during destination input or during route guidance.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Route selection } .
3.
Select the desired priority for the route:
> { Motorway } .
> { Without motorway } .
> { Fastest } .
> { Shortest } .
Wordmatch principle
The wordmatch principle makes the input of place-names and streets easier. It compares your destination inputs continuously with the data stored on the navigation DVD, and reacts even if slight discrepancies are found. This has the following advantages for you:
> You can also input place-names in a form which differs from the official version, provided that the alternative entry is familiar in another country or language.
Example:
With the German map DVD in use, instead of the German name "München" you can input the English version "Munich" or the
Italian version "Monaco".
> When entering place-names or streets, the system completes the name automatically as soon as it has been identified beyond doubt.
> Example:
If you wish to be guided to Lauchstädter
Strasse in Munich, for instance, the system will have identified the street name as soon as you enter the letter "c", and will show the complete name in the lower half of the control display.
The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD. This makes it impossible for an incorrect name or unknown addresses to be accepted.
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Route guidance
Starting route guidance
Route guidance is started for the topmost destination of the destinations list, see page
At least one destination must be in the destinations list.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Navigation".
3.
Press the controller if necessary.
4.
Select "Route guide" and press the controller.
Ending/continuing route guidance
Ending route guidance
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "Route guide" and press the controller.
Route guidance is started. While the navigation computer is calculating the route to your destination, depending on the display mode, the distance and direction to the destination as the crow flies are displayed at the top right of the control display.
After the route has been calculated, route guidance appears on the control display, depending on the display mode selected. The destination place is displayed in the status line.
During route guidance, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive. A required change of direction is drawn to your attention in good time via spoken instructions.
Via the voice input system:
{ Route guidance on } .
Route guidance is switched off.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Route guidance off } .
Continuing route guidance
If the destination was not reached before the end of your last journey or if it was reached and there is another destination in the destinations list, the following query will be displayed at the start of your next journey, when you call up the navigation system: "Continue destination guidance?".
Route guidance starts automatically after a short while.
To start route guidance immediately:
Select "YES" and press the controller.
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Displaying route
Various modes are available for displaying the course of the route during route guidance, depending on specification.
Displaying arrow view
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "View" and press the controller.
3.
Select "Arrow display" and press the controller.
Route guidance is displayed by means of arrows on the control display and the info
display, see page 10 . In addition, current
traffic reports affecting the route will be displayed.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Navigation } .
2.
{ Arrow view } .
Displaying map view
You can have the car's location shown on a map. After starting route guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "View" and press the controller.
3.
Select the desired map view and press the controller.
1 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
2 Distance to the destination on the calculated route
3 Destination
4 Street name during the next change of direction
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
Based on the distance to the next change of direction, the arrows are displayed in different sizes.
In areas which are not yet fully covered by the navigation DVD, an arrow indicates the direction to be taken. This should help you decide which way to go when you reach a fork in the street or a junction.
<
> "Dir. to north"
> "Dir. of travel"
> "Perspective"
Via the voice input system:
{ Map }
Shows the map view currently selected for the navigation system.
Changing the scale
Turn the controller to alter the scale.
Scales for the navigation CD:
100 m or 125 yd to 100 km or 50 miles
Scales for the navigation DVD:
100 m or 125 yd to 1000 km or 500 miles
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Scale } .
2.
Enter the scale.
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Displaying streets or places along the route
You can have a list of streets or towns along the route displayed during route guidance.
The distances remaining and traffic reports for each section of the route are likewise displayed.
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "View" and press the controller.
3.
Select "Route" and press the controller.
Repeating spoken instructions
1.
Press the controller during route guidance.
2.
Select symbol and press the controller, to repeat the last route instruction, if the voice output is switched on.
Spoken instructions can also be repeated via the programmable buttons on the steering wheel and next to the controller, see
.
<
Adjusting the volume
The volume can be adjusted only while a spoken instruction is being issued.
1.
Have the last spoken instruction repeated if desired.
2.
Turn the knob during the instruction until the desired volume is obtained.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Route guidance by spoken instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
1.
Press the controller during route guidance.
2.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
This volume is independent of the volume of the audio and video sources.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Via the voice input system:
{ Message on } or
{ Message off } .
Changing the route
Blocking sections of the route
You can select from a list and block sections of the planned route that you do not wish to follow.
The course of the route is calculated anew.
1.
Press the controller.
2.
Select "New route" and press the controller.
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "Avoid sect." and press the controller.
3.
Select "Avoid route" and press the controller.
The route list is displayed on the control display.
4.
Select one or more connecting sections of route that you wish to avoid and press the controller.
To correct a false entry:
Select a different section of route and press the controller.
5.
To exit the route list and calculate a new route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Avoiding sections of route
You can also instruct the navigation system to deviate from sections of the route during route guidance. You do this by specifying after how many kilometres or miles of the original route you wish to return to it.
A certain section up to 50 km, approx. 30 miles, can be bypassed.
1.
Press the controller.
2.
Select "New route" and press the controller.
4.
Turn the controller to enter the desired value, then press the controller.
5.
Select "Calculate" and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit without changing the route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
At any time you can have traffic information displayed by radio stations that broadcast traffic situation information: Traffic Message Channel
TMC.
This traffic information is constantly updated with the aid of measurements from traffic control centres and information from congestion detectors.
The traffic information is automatically shown during route guidance. It can also be called up manually via iDrive:
> Calling up current traffic reports on certain
radio stations, see Selecting TMC stations on page 150
.
> Calling up extended traffic information, see
Traffic Information Plus traffic information *
.
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Switching traffic information transmission on/off
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Traffic info" and press the controller.
Calling up traffic information manually
1.
Select "Messages" and press the controller.
2.
Select the desired traffic information and press the controller.
4.
Select "TMC station" and press the controller.
The TMC station with the strongest signal is automatically selected. Traffic information can be transmitted and displayed.
If you switch off broadcasting of traffic information, dynamic route guidance is deactivated.
<
Selecting TMC stations
You can call up the latest traffic reports from certain radio stations.
1.
Select "TMC station" and press the controller.
A list of all TMC stations that can be received is displayed.
2.
Select a TMC station and press the controller.
"automatic": automatic selection of the
TMC station with the strongest received signal.
Current traffic reports are transferred and displayed.
Detailed information on traffic reports is shown.
Traffic reports can be transmitted if at least one
TMC station can be received.
Traffic congestion along the chosen route is displayed first.
If "TMC station" is switched on, "TMC" appears in the top status line.
<
Selecting categories
You can hide certain types of messages in the traffic information message list.
1.
Select "Categories" and press the controller.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
You can limit the scope of the traffic information displayed to the type that is of interest to you, e.g."Traffic", "Roadworks" or
"Roads closed".
The categories of traffic information are displayed.
2.
Select the desired category and press the controller.
The traffic information for the category selected is displayed.
Traffic information affecting the selected route cannot be hidden. For your safety, traffic information alerting you to a potential hazard, such as objects on the carriageway, cannot be hidden.
<
Traffic information symbols
TMC traffic information is shown in all route views by means of the following symbols:
Traffic event if scale of map is greater than 10 km or 5 miles, arrow pointing in the direction affected
Several traffic events are available.
These are displayed individually with an enlarged scale
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
Undefined traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong side of road
Height restriction
No parking
Fog
Heavy precipitation
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Risk of hold-ups
Stop-and-go traffic
Congestion
Icy roads
Snow chains
Uneven surface
Accident
Narrow road
Delay
Police checks
Representation of traffic information in the map view
The traffic information symbols are shown in the map view up to a scale of 200 km or
100 miles.
At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional information is displayed. The length, direction
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
and severity of traffic congestion are shown by arrows along the route, e.g.:
Slow traffic
Stop-and-go traffic
Congestion
Congestion in both directions
Along the planned route
Symbol with red border, together with the traffic obstruction symbol.
Away from the planned route
> Map scale up to 10 km or 5 miles:
Symbol with grey border, together with the traffic obstruction symbol.
> Map scale from 20 km or 10 miles:
Symbol with grey border and an arrow pointing in the appropriate direction.
Traffic information during route guidance
If the navigation system identifies a hold-up or congestion on the planned route while guiding you to a destination, once you are within approx. 50 km or 25 miles of the hold-up it supplies you with information on:
> The distance to the last possible exit
> The reason for the congestion, in the form of symbols
> The distance to the end of the congestion
> The length of the congestion
Avoiding congestion with dynamic route guidance switched on
If "Dynamic route" is activated, traffic congestion within a distance of approx. 100 km or
50 miles is taken into account. Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic congestion, an alternative route is calculated automatically. This may also cut across the traffic congestion. It is displayed to you approx. 3 km, approx. 2 miles, before the traffic congestion.
To obtain further information on traffic prob-
.
Avoiding congestion with dynamic route guidance switched off
All traffic events that appear in the message list are displayed in the map view.
If there is congestion along your route, the navigation system informs you of it within a distance of approx. 50 km or 25 miles of the congestion, as well as signalling "Last exit" shortly before you reach it.
To avoid the congestion:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
or
1.
Select "Route guide" and press the controller.
2.
Select "New route" and press the controller.
3.
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system determines a new route and then returns to the original route.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Displaying current location*
You can have the car's location displayed even with route guidance switched off.
Saving current location
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Location" and press the controller.
1.
Select "Dest. input" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Location" and press the controller.
The current location of your BMW is displayed.
3.
Select "AS ADDRESS" and press the controller.
3.
Select "Street" or "Junction" and press the controller.
A list of possible street names is displayed.
4.
Select the desired street and press the controller.
5.
Select "ACCEPT" and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Correcting current location
If the navigation system is unable to identify your current location, e.g. if you are in an underground car park, only the longitude and latitude are displayed in addition to the country and town/city.
You can then correct your current location, e.g. by entering the name of the adjacent street or the nearest junction.
6.
Select "AS ADDRESS" as appropriate and press the controller to transfer the current location to the address book.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the location displayed on a
map if you desire, see Displaying map view on
page
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
What to do if ...
What to do if ...
> a navigation DVD has been inserted but a request to insert the DVD is displayed on the control display?
The navigation DVD is possibly not the correct DVD for the navigation system. Check the DVD's label.
> you call up your car's current location, but the display is not accurate?
You are in a poor-reception area, you are currently in an area not covered by the navigation DVD, or the system is currently calculating your location. Please try again later.
> a destination is not transferred to the route guidance system?
The data for the destination is not available on the navigation DVD currently in use.
Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
> a destination without a street is not transferred to the route guidance system?
No city centre can be determined on the navigation DVD for the place specified.
Enter any street, or a specific destination such as the station, for the town or city in question, then start route guidance.
> you wish to input a destination, but the correct letter of the alphabet cannot be selected?
The data for the destination is not available on the navigation DVD currently in use. In this case the system will not let you choose the letters of an address it cannot recognise. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
> directions cease to be given immediately before junctions during route guidance?
You are driving in an area for which full digital information is not yet available on the navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have deviated from the proposed route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route.
> the navigation system does not respond to your inputs?
If the battery has been disconnected, up to
15 minutes may elapse before the system is fully functional again.
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This chapter helps you to enjoy listening to radio stations, watching television programmes or playing CDs, MDs or DVDs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On/off and settings
The following audio and video sources share the same controls and adjustment features:
> Radio
> CD player *
> CD changer *
> MD player *
> Television TV *
> DVD changer *
The CD changer can play CDs with compressed audio files, MP3.
<
Controls
The audio and video sources can be operated via:
> Buttons on the CD/MD player
> iDrive
>
Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9
Buttons on the CD/MD player
3 button
> Press briefly: selecting frequency range
AM or FM
For Professional radio for "AM" and for
Business radio:
> Press and hold down: autostore, updating selection of stations that can be received
4 CD or MD slot
5 button
CD or MD eject
6 button
Station/track search
> Changing radio stations
> Fast forward/reverse
> Changing music track for CD and MD player, changing chapter for DVD changer
> Changing channel for TV
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
The picture shows a CD player merely as an example.
1 Sound output for entertainment systems on/off, volume
> Press: switching on/off
When switched on, the last radio station tuned or CD/MD track is called up.
2
> Turn: adjusting the volume
button
Selecting radio, CD/MD player and CD changer
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
There is a choice of:
> "FM" and "AM": selecting radio reception.
> "DAB": selecting DAB tuner.
> "CD" or "MD" and "CDC": selecting CD/
MD player or CD changer.
> "AUX": selecting external audio device.
> "TV" and "DVD": selecting television receiver or DVD changer.
> "Picture": setting picture, format and picture format.
> "Tone": setting sound, e.g. treble, bass.
You can also operate the radio, CD and MD player, CD changer, external audio device, TV and DVD changer via the buttons on the steering wheel, see page
, and via the voice input system *
Turn the knob until the desired volume is obtained.
As soon as you start to make a telephone call or receive an incoming call, the sound output is automatically muted.
<
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Adjusting volume of traffic reports*
Switching on/off
Adjusting volume
To switch the sound output for entertainment systems on/off: press the knob.
The set calls up the audio or video source last selected, i.e. radio, CD, MD, external audio device, TV or DVD.
Via the voice input system:
{ Radio on } or { Audio off } .
Operation with ignition switched off
With the ignition switched off, the audio and video functions remain available for approx.
30 minutes.
All you have to do is switch sound output back on.
Turn the knob during a traffic report until the desired volume is obtained.
This volume is retained for traffic reports.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
If the volume setting for other audio or video sources is louder than for the traffic reports, the volume of the traffic report is raised correspondingly. However, this setting is not retained if the other audio or video sources are turned down again.
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Tone settings
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume control. The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.
The loudspeakers, rear headphones and external audio device can be adjusted separately.
The tone settings of the headphones are adjusted on the rear screen; the headphones must be plugged in for this adjustment to be possible. Only treble, bass and balance can be adjusted.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
Altering tone settings
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "Tone" and press the controller.
Treble and bass
1.
Select "Treble" or "Bass" and press the controller.
2.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
3.
Press the controller to store the setting.
Balance and fader
1.
Select "Balance" or "Fader" and press the controller.
4.
Select the desired tone setting.
2.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
3.
Press the controller to store the setting.
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automatically boosts the volume as the car's speed increases. You can select various stages for the increase in volume.
1.
Select "Speed Vol." and press the controller.
2.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
3.
Press the controller to store the setting.
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
LOGIC7*
Sets the spatial tone effect between 0 and 10.
The optimum spatial effect is at a setting of 5 or 6. At 0 the spatial tone effect is switched off, this setting is suitable, e.g. for audio games.
1.
Select "LOGIC7" and press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default setting apart from "Speed Vol.".
Select "RESET" and press the controller.
2.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
3.
Press the controller to store the setting.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a Harman International Group company.
<
Equaliser
You can adjust individual audio frequency ranges.
1.
Select the troller.
symbol and press the con-
2.
Turn the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range, then press the controller.
3.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
4.
Press the controller to store the setting.
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
Your radio is designed for receiving the FM and
AM wavebands:
> FM: stations on the VHF waveband
> AM: stations on the LW, MW and SW waveband
Listening to the radio
Switching on audio or video sources, see page
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
Changing stations
Via buttons in the centre console
Press the button for the respective direction until the next station is reached.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Radio } .
2.
{ Next station } or { Station back } .
Via iDrive
FM waveband:
1.
Select "FM" and press the controller.
Stations are presented on the control display according to different selection criteria, e.g.
"Memorised stations" for "FM" or "MW Autostore" for "AM".
Via the voice input system:
{ Radio } .
> { VHF } or { FM } .
> { Medium wave } or { AM } .
> { Short wave } or { SW } .
> { Long wave } or { LW } .
2.
Choose selection criterion and press the controller:
For Professional radio * :
> "All stations":
Display of all stations that can currently be received on the "FM" waveband.
> "Memorised stations":
Display of up to twelve stations that you have initially stored, see page
For Business radio:
> "Autostore list":
To select the stations on the "FM" waveband, see page
received during the last autostore run.
> "Memorised stations":
Display of up to twelve stations that you have initially stored, see page
3.
Turn the controller to select a station and press the controller.
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
AM waveband:
1.
Select "AM" and press the controller.
2.
Select the frequency range by turning and pressing the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
3.
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
You can select between the following frequency ranges and their respective autostore levels:
> "LW" and "LW Autostore"
> "SW" and "SW Autostore"
> "MW" and "MW Autostore"
3.
Turn the controller to select a station and press the controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are automatically sampled in succession.
1.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
If you select "AM" you will also need to select a waveband and press the controller.
Scan starts.
To stop Scan:
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
Scan is interrupted and the selected station is retained.
Selecting frequency manually
You can use the manual search to select a frequency directly.
1.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
If you select "AM" you will also need to select a waveband and press the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select frequency display and press the controller.
4.
Turn the controller until the desired frequency is selected.
5.
Press the controller to apply the setting.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Radio } .
2.
{ Frequency 87 ..108 (Point 0 ..9) } .
Updating choice of receivable stations
For Professional radio for "AM" and for Business radio:
If you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received on a longer journey, you can update the choice of receivable stations.
1.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
If you select "AM" you will also need to select a waveband and press the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
3.
Select "AUTOSTORE" and press the controller.
For Professional radio: "AUTOSTORE" is only available on the "AM" waveband. If you select "FM" stations will be selected automatically.
<
Station search
For Business radio:
You can select stations that are received in addition to those displayed.
The station name or the frequency of the station are displayed in the lower status line, and the frequency additionally on the control display.
Via buttons in the centre console
Press and hold down the corresponding direction.
The next station will be called up.
button for the
Via iDrive
1.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
If you select "AM" you will also need to select a waveband and press the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
3.
Select the desired direction and press the controller.
The next station will be called up. The frequency is shown on the control display.
The choice of receivable stations is updated, the frequencies of the stations are displayed.
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Memorising stations
You can memorise the station you are currently listening to.
You can also memorise stations manually in the
"Autostore list" if this is selected before memorising them.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
4.
Select the selection criterion for "FM" and waveband for "AM" and press the controller.
5.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
8.
Press the controller.
The stations are saved for the remote control currently in use.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Radio } .
2.
{ Station 1...12
} .
Changing memory location
1.
Select the required station and press the controller.
2.
Turn the controller until the desired memory location is selected.
3.
Press the controller.
6.
Select "MEMORISE" and press the controller.
7.
Turn the controller until the desired memory location is selected.
The station is now memorised.
Regional programmes
On the VHF/FM frequency range, certain stations broadcast regional programmes either all day or at certain times of day. You can specify whether or not to switch from the regional programme of the current station when you go beyond its transmission area.
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
1.
Select "FM" and press the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
3.
Select "RDS" and press the controller until
"REG off" is displayed or hidden.
> Where reception conditions are good, the names of stations are displayed on the control display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, station names may take some time to appear in the display.
Switching RDS on/off
1.
Select "FM" and press the controller.
2.
Choose selection criterion and press the controller.
3.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
4.
Select "RDS" and press the controller.
> No display:
The radio switches only to stations with the same regional programme. If the regional programme is not transmitted by any other station, the reception quality may deteriorate.
> "REG off":
The radio will also switch to stations from the same broadcasting network with different regional programmes.
Radio Data System RDS*
RDS broadcasts additional information on the
VHF/FM waveband. RDS stations therefore offer the following features:
> Where a radio station is broadcast on several frequencies, the set automatically switches to whichever frequency offers the best reception.
RDS is available on the FM waveband.
<
Traffic reports*
For the duration of traffic reports broadcast at an increased volume, TV reception, CD, DVD or
MD operation or operation of the external audio device is interrupted. The voice output of the navigation system, however, remains active.
TP function
If the TP function – Traffic Programme/traffic reports – is switched on, you will receive traffic reports even if you are tuned to a station that does not broadcast traffic reports.
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Displays and signals
> "TP":
Traffic reports are switched on.
> "T":
Traffic reports are switched off, but the selected radio station does broadcast traffic reports at normal volume.
> No display:
Traffic reports are switched off, the selected radio station does not broadcast traffic reports.
Switching traffic reports on/off
Select "TP" and press the controller.
To switch off during a traffic report, press the controller twice.
Adjusting volume of traffic reports, see
.
With the TMC function switched on, you can only receive traffic reports if you are tuned to a station that broadcasts them.
<
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ Radio } .
2.
{ Traffic announcements } or
{ Traffic announcements off } .
Interrupting a traffic report
Select "TP" and press the controller.
The traffic report is interrupted.
Selecting TMC station
TMC: Traffic Message Channel.
Irrespective of the traffic information station tuned, the TMC station with the best reception is automatically tuned in the background. This is providing you have switched on "TMC station", see page
DAB tuner*
The digital radio provides you with additional stations that are transmitted with high sound quality.
Up to 15 stations may be broadcast on the same frequency. These stations are combined into what is know as an ensemble. Each station can transmit additional information, such as weather reports or the name of the artist performing the current music track.
Individual stations may also offer several different programmes. Sports stations, for example, may broadcast different sports events at the same time. You then have the option of choosing a particular sports event.
The following functions can be operated in the same way as the radio if you select an ensemble:
>
Memorising stations, see page 165
>
Changing memory location, see page 165
> Traffic reports * , see page
Updating ensembles
If you move out of the reception range of the ensembles originally received on a longer journey, you can update the list of receivable ensembles.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
5.
Select "AUTOSTORE" and press the controller.
Changing stations
1.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2.
Select the desired list and press the controller:
> "Autostore list":
Displays ensembles that can be received.
> "Memorised stations":
Displays all memorised stations. Memorising stations, see page
> "Current stations":
Displays all stations in the current ensemble.
The choice of receivable ensembles is updated, and the names of the ensembles are displayed.
3.
Select an ensemble, if appropriate, and press the controller.
4.
Select a station and press the controller.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
If you are currently in an area in which the selected station cannot be received uninterrupted, interference and interruptions to transmission may occur during reception, or reception may fail altogether.
<
To select the stations that can be received, see
Selecting a frequency band on page 170
.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations in the current list are automatically sampled in succession.
1.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2.
Select the desired list and press the controller:
> "Autostore list":
Stations that can be received in the current ensemble.
> "Memorised stations":
All memorised stations.
> "Current stations":
All stations in the current ensemble, then the stations of the next ensemble.
3.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
Scan starts.
To stop Scan:
Press the controller.
Scan is interrupted and the selected station is retained.
Via buttons in the centre console
To sample the stations, press and hold down the button for the corresponding direction.
To stop Scan, press the button again.
The station name is displayed in the lower status line, see page
Manual station selection
You can switch between all ensembles that can be received. The selected ensemble and its corresponding stations are displayed.
Via buttons in the centre console
Press button for the corresponding direction.
The next station of the current ensemble is called up.
Via iDrive
1.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
4.
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select the desired direction for stations, top arrow, or ensembles, bottom arrow, and press the controller.
5.
Press the controller again.
Additional information is shown.
The next station of the current ensemble or the next ensemble is called up.
Displaying additional information
In the case of digital stations, additional information may be displayed depending on the station.
1.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2.
Select the desired list and press the controller.
3.
Select an ensemble, if appropriate, and press the controller.
Press the arrow to exit the list.
Selecting a frequency band
Some digital stations are transmitted regionally while others are transmitted nationally.
Contact BMW Service for more information about frequency bands.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
4.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
4.
Select a station and press the controller.
5.
Select "SET" and press the controller.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
6.
Select a frequency band:
> "Band III" for national stations
> "L-Band" for regional stations
7.
Press the controller.
The function is selected.
4.
Select "TUNE" and press the controller.
5.
Select "SET" and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
These settings only affect the receivable ensembles that are subsequently updated with "AUTOSTORE" as well as manual station search. If you have deactivated a frequency band after you have memorised stations from that frequency band, those stations can still be broadcast.
<
Automatic changeover
You can make a setting determining whether reception should change over to the analogue frequency automatically if digital broadcasts cannot be received.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "DAB" and press the controller.
6.
Select "DAB" ... "FM" and press the controller.
The function is selected.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
"DAB" ... "FM": reception will change over automatically to the analogue frequency.
Once digital broadcasts can be received again, the radio will change back to digital reception.
Reception can only change over if a station broadcasts on both DAB and FM. If there is no analogue frequency available, a corresponding message will appear in the lower status line, see page
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
If the headphones are connected in the rear, automatic changeover will not be possible.
<
Listening to additional programmes
This symbol appears if a selected station contains additional programmes. Sports stations, for example, may broadcast different sports events at the same time. You then have the option of choosing a particular sports event.
1.
Select a station and press the controller.
2.
Select the additional programme and press the controller.
You will hear the selected programme.
The name of the programme is displayed in the lower status line, see page
.
Once the programme is over, the radio switches back to the selected station.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player *
Listening to CDs
1.
Switch on sound output for entertainment
.
2.
Insert the CD with the label side uppermost.
The CD is pulled in automatically.
To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in the drive:
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "CD" and press the controller.
Via iDrive
Select the track by turning and pressing the controller.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD } .
2.
{ Track 1...30
} .
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD } .
2.
{ CD on } .
Selecting a track
Via buttons in the centre console
Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track on the current CD is reached.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD } .
2.
{ Next } or { Back } .
Scan starts.
To stop Scan:
Press the controller or press button.
Scan is interrupted and the selected track is retained.
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Random play
All tracks on the current CD are played at least once each in random order.
Select "RND" and press the controller.
To stop random play:
Select "RND" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the appropriate direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.
Notes
The BMW CD player is officially designated a Class 1 laser product. Do not remove the cover from the housing. Never use it if the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subsequently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the temperatures to which these media are exposed during playing, and could damage the system irreparably.
Use only round CDs with a standard diameter of
12 cm, approx. 5 in, and do not use CDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g. CD singles, otherwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be impossible to eject.
<
General malfunctions
The BMW CD player is optimised for operation inside the vehicle. It may react with more sensitivity to defective CDs than devices for stationary application.
If a CD cannot be played, first check whether it is correctly inserted into the drive.
Atmospheric humidity
Due to high atmospheric humidity the CD or the focusing lens for laser beam can be misty and as a result it may be impossible to play it for a while.
Malfunctions with individual CDs
If malfunctions occur only with individual CDs, this can have one of the following causes.
Self-recorded CDs
Causes of malfunctions with self-recorded CDs are, e.g. non-uniform data-creation and copying methods as well as low quality or rapid ageing of the blank disc being used.
Only write on the upper side of CDs using a special marker pen.
Damaged CDs
Avoid causing fingerprints and protect against dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs in a case.
Do not expose CDs to temperatures in excess of 50 6 /122 7 , high atmospheric humidity and direct sunlight.
CDs with copy protection
CDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs being impossible to play, or only playable with restrictions.
Care notes
For useful information on this subject, see the booklet Looking after your car.
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD changer *
Installed position
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed above the glove box.
Compressed audio files
The CD changer can play CDs with compressed audio files, MP3.
Removing the CD magazine
To load or empty it, take the CD magazine out of the CD changer:
Inserting the CD magazine
1.
Press button 1 .
The flap opens.
2.
Insert the magazine 2 in fully in the direction of the arrow.
The flap closes automatically.
The CD changer automatically reads in the CDs in the changer and is then operational.
When playing CDs with compressed audio files, the CD changer may take approx. 1 minute per
CD to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.
1.
Press button 1 .
The flap 2 opens and the magazine is ejected.
2.
Take out the magazine.
Loading/emptying the CD magazine
Listening to CDs
1.
Switch on sound output for entertainment
systems if necessary, see page 159
.
2.
Load and insert the CD magazine if necessary.
3.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
4.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at the edge and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
> To load: insert the CD into a compartment with the label side uppermost.
> To empty: pull out the appropriate holder, see arrow, and take out the CD.
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select "CDC" and press the controller.
Via iDrive
Select the track by turning and pressing the controller.
6.
Select the desired CD and press the controller.
CD playback starts with the first track. At the end of the final track, the next CD is selected and played.
The control display indicates how many CDs there are in the magazine.
If a CD is not displayed even though it is in the magazine, check whether the CD has been inserted the right way up or is defective.
If a DVD changer is installed in parallel, up to twelve CDs can be played.
<
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD changer } .
2.
{ CD on } .
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD changer } .
2.
{ CD Track 1...30
} .
Compressed audio files
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3, are identified by an asterisk.
1.
Select a directory, if appropriate, and press the controller.
Selecting a track
Via buttons in the centre console
Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track on the current CD is reached.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD changer } .
2.
{ Next } or { Back } .
2.
Select track and press the controller to start playback.
To change the directory:
Select a directory and press the controller.
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ CD changer } .
2.
{ CD on } .
3.
{ CD 1...6
} .
Displaying information about the track
With compressed audio files, you can have any saved information about the current track displayed, e.g. the name of the artist and the album.
Press the controller during reception.
Random play
All tracks on the current CD are played at least once each in random order.
Select "RND" and press the controller.
To stop random play:
Select "RND" and press the controller.
The information will be displayed for the current
title, see also Status lines on page 18 .
Fast forward/reverse
1.
Select the direction.
Press and hold down the button.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.
2.
To interrupt fast forward/reverse, release the button.
The current CD starts to play from the selected point.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
To stop Scan:
Press the controller or press button.
Scan is interrupted and the selected track is retained.
Notes
The BMW CD changer is officially designated a Class 1 laser product. Do not remove the cover from the housing. Never use it if the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subsequently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the temperatures to which these media are exposed during playing, and could damage the system irreparably.
Use only round CDs with a standard diameter of
12 cm, approx. 5 in, and do not use CDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g. CD singles, otherwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be impossible to eject.
<
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
General malfunctions
The BMW CD changer is optimised for the operation inside the vehicle. It may react with more sensitivity to defective CDs than devices for stationary application.
If a CD cannot be played, first check whether it is correctly inserted into the drive.
Atmospheric humidity
Due to high atmospheric humidity the CD or the focusing lens for laser beam can be misty and as a result it may be impossible to play it for a while.
Malfunctions with individual CDs
If malfunctions occur only with individual CDs, this can have one of the following causes.
Self-recorded CDs
Causes of malfunctions with self-recorded CDs are, e.g. non-uniform data-creation and copying methods as well as low quality or rapid ageing of the blank disc being used.
Only write on the upper side of CDs using a special marker pen.
Damaged CDs
Avoid causing fingerprints and protect against dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs in a case.
Do not expose CDs to temperatures in excess of 50 6 /122 7 , high atmospheric humidity and direct sunlight.
CDs with copy protection
CDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs being impossible to play, or only playable with restrictions.
Care notes
For useful information on this subject, see the booklet Looking after your car.
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
MD player *
Listening to MDs
Switch on sound output for entertainment systems, see page
Insert a MiniDisc. The CD starts to play automatically if sound output is switched on.
To start playback if there is already a MiniDisc in the MD drive:
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "MD" and press the controller.
Via iDrive
Select the track by turning and pressing the controller.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ MiniDisc } .
2.
{ MiniDisc Track 1...30
} .
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current MD are automatically sampled once in succession.
Select "SCAN" and press the controller.
Via the voice input system:
{ MiniDisc on } .
Selecting a track
Via buttons in the centre console
Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track on the current MD is reached.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ MiniDisc } .
2.
{ Next } or { Back } .
To stop Scan:
Press the controller or press button.
Scan is interrupted and the selected track is retained.
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Random play
All tracks on the current MD are played at least once each in random order.
Select "RND" and press the controller.
To stop random play:
Select "RND" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
1.
Select the direction.
Press and hold down the button.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.
2.
To interrupt fast forward/reverse, release the button.
The MD starts to play from the selected point.
Notes
Faults
Due to high atmospheric humidity the focusing lens for laser beam can be misty and as a result it may be impossible to play it for a while.
Care notes
For useful information on this subject, see the booklet Looking after your car.
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
External audio device
You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.
You are recommended to select neutral tone settings on the external audio device and set the volume to a medium value. The tone may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Adjusting the volume
The volume of playback from the external audio device in the vehicle depends on the device. If that volume differs considerably from the volume of other audio and video sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes to a similar setting.
1.
Select "Adjust volume" and press the controller.
Connecting
Fold up the lids of the centre armrest.
1 Power supply for your external audio device:
Socket with removable cap
2 Connection for audio playback:
Jack plug 3.5 mm or 1/8 in
To play audio tracks through the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or lineout port of the external device to connection 2 .
2.
Turn the controller to adjust the volume to a similar setting and press the controller.
The volume setting is retained when the device is disconnected from the vehicle.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for principle see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "AUX" and press the controller.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Television TV *
Calling up channel
Press the knob if sound output is switched off.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
3.
Select "TV" and press the controller.
Channels
The TV system is equipped with a digital receiver * . In areas where both analogue and digital television is broadcast, both analogue and digital channels can be received. You can change between these channels.
indicates that digital television is being received.
Changing channel
Via buttons in the centre console
Press the button in the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired channel is obtained.
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ TV } .
2.
{ Next } or { Back } .
Via iDrive
1.
Press the controller.
The set calls up the channel last selected.
For your safety, the TV picture on the front control display is only shown at a speed of up to approx. 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph.
On certain national-market versions, a TV picture can only be obtained on the front control display with the parking brake applied.
<
Perform all inputs while the car is stationary. The car's occupants and other road users could otherwise be put at risk.
<
Via the voice input system:
{ TV on } .
The channels are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select channel and press the controller.
Updating display of receivable channels
If you have driven out of the transmission range of the channels you were originally receiving, you can update the display of receivable channels.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On cars with a rear screen, the receivable programmes are updated automatically. If there is no rear screen, it may be necessary to update the channels manually depending upon the equipment.
<
1.
Select "TV" and press the controller.
2.
Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
Adjusting picture*
On cars with a rear screen, you can call up the menu items while watching television by pressing the controller.
For the control display and the rear screen the colour settings can be done separately.
Adjusting the brightness and contrast
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "Picture" and press the controller.
The display of channels with the best reception is updated.
Automatic changeover*
On cars with a rear screen, you can make a setting determining whether the TV should switch between analogue and digital reception automatically if analogue or digital reception is lost in an area.
1.
Select "TV" and press the controller.
2.
Select "[Follow]" and press the controller.
3.
Select "Brightness", "Colour" or "Contrast" and press the controller.
4.
Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained.
5.
Press the controller to store the setting.
This symbol will appear when you select
"[Follow]" if automatic changeover has been activated.
Changing format
The TV format is not the same in every country.
However, you can adapt your TV receiver to accept all common TV formats.
With the TV format NTSC you have the possibility to additionally set the colour temperature.
You can call up the menu items by pressing the controller during playback.
1.
Press the controller if necessary.
2.
Select "Picture" and press the controller.
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "TV format" and press the controller.
4.
Select the country in which you are currently driving and press the controller.
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
DVD changer *
Installed position Loading/emptying the DVD magazine
The BMW DVD changer for six DVDs or audio
CDs is located behind the side trim on the left of the luggage compartment.
Removing the DVD magazine
To load or empty it, take the DVD magazine out of the DVD changer:
When loading DVDs or CDs to or removing them from the magazine, always hold them only at the edge and do not touch the reflective sensing area of the DVD or CD.
> To load: insert the DVD or CD into a magazine compartment with the label side uppermost.
> To empty: pull out the appropriate holder as illustrated, and take out the corresponding
DVD or CD.
Inserting the DVD magazine
1.
Push the flap to the right.
2.
Insert the magazine in fully in the direction of the arrow.
1.
Slide the flap to the right, see arrow 1 .
2.
Press the button, arrow 2 .
The magazine is ejected.
3.
Close the flap again.
The DVD changer automatically reads in the
DVDs or CDs in the changer and is then operational.
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
DVD country codes
Your DVD changer will only play DVDs with the code of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The information accompanying each DVD indicates which country code it supports. This code cannot be changed. The six code zones are given in the table below:
5
6
3
4
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Near East, South Africa
South-East Asia
Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
North-West Asia, North Africa
China
DVDs with the code 0 are suitable for all players.
<
Playing a DVD
1.
Switch on sound output for entertainment
systems if necessary, see page 159
.
2.
Load and insert the DVD magazine if necessary.
3.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
4.
Move the controller towards "Entertainment".
5.
Select "DVD" and press the controller.
The control display indicates how many DVDs there are in the magazine.
If a DVD is not displayed even though it is in the magazine, check whether it has been inserted the right way up or is defective.
If there are audio CDs in the DVD magazine, they are displayed in the CD changer menu, not in the DVD menu.
If the DVDs in the magazine have been changed or if the disc last played from the DVD magazine was an audio CD, the lowest DVD in the DVD magazine starts to play first.
For your safety, the TV picture on the front control display is only shown at a speed of up to approx. 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph.
On certain national-market versions, a DVD picture can only be obtained on the front control display with the parking brake applied. However, you can listen to the TV sound while driving.
<
Perform all inputs while the car is stationary. The car's occupants and other road users could otherwise be put at risk.
<
Via the voice input system:
1.
{ DVD on } .
2.
{ DVD 1...6
} .
DVD control
Via the DVD control, you can select the title and chapters, call up the DVD-specific menu and operate functions such as language, fast forward and reverse, and stills.
A DVD may deactivate certain DVD control options temporarily, or possibly even for the entire duration of the DVD. It will then not be possible to select those DVD control options. If this happens, try to make selections via the
DVD-specific menu.
During playback:
Press the controller to call up the DVD control options.
If playback was previously interrupted, it will begin again at the same point after a few seconds.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Release the controller.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The current DVD will start to play from the selected point.
The DVD control options disappear again after a short while if you do not select a function.
Softkey Function
Starting play
Stopping a DVD
Closing DVD control options
Switching the still on or off
Skipping chapter
You can switch to the next or previous chapter while a DVD is playing.
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select and press as often as necessary until the desired chapter is reached.
or:
Press the button at the left or right side as often as necessary until the desired chapter is reached.
DVD-specific menu:
Selecting functions
DVD-specific menu:
Returning to previous menu
Adjusting picture
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select the arrow and press the controller.
3.
Adjusting picture, see page
Fast forward/reverse
Fast forward/reverse via DVD control
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select and press the controller.
3.
To increase the fast forward/reverse speed, press the controller several times.
A distorted DVD picture is visible.
Stop fast forward/reverse:
Select and press the controller.
The DVD begins to play from the selected point.
Fast forward/reverse via controller
1.
Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
Fast forward/reverse is started.
2.
Turn the controller further.
The speed is increased.
Stills
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
At the desired point, select and press the controller.
The film is halted.
3.
Select or and press the controller to cancel the still image.
The DVD starts to play again from the point at which it was interrupted.
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Selecting picture format
You can adapt the format of the DVD to your screen.
The picture format is a DVD-specific function and is not available on all DVDs.
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select and press the controller.
3.
Select the arrow and press the controller.
4.
Select "Picture" and press the controller.
Selecting language, subtitles and camera angle
Many DVDs contain dialogues and subtitles in various languages or descriptions of scenes for the hard of hearing. On some DVDs, it is in addition possible to view the film from various camera angles. These functions are stored on the
DVD.
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select "FULL MENU" and press the controller.
5.
Select "Picture form" and press the controller.
6.
Select the desired picture format and press the controller.
For the control display and the rear screen the colour settings can be done separately.
<
3.
Select the desired item and press the controller:
> "TITLE"
To display the DVD title.
> "AUDIO"
To select from various languages.
> "SUBTITLE"
To select the language of the subtitles.
> "ANGLE"
To select the camera angle.
Messages or symbols are generally flashed up during a film to indicate that various different camera angles can be selected. These are usually only available for short periods.
On some DVDs, the language, subtitles and camera angle or title can only be selected via the DVD-specific menu.
Please note the options in the information on your DVD.
<
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Calling up DVD-specific menu
Further functions may be stored on DVDs. For instance, the viewer may be able to choose from several alternative plots or call up information on the film.
1.
During playback, press the controller to display the DVD control.
2.
Select "MENU" or "TOP" and press the controller.
"MENU" generally takes you to the DVDspecific main menu. Some DVDs contain a further "TOP" menu in which you can for instance select musical scenes.
Making a selection:
3.
Select .
4.
Select "OK" and press the controller.
To return to a previous menu:
Select ler.
or arrow and press the control-
The language, subtitles, camera angle or title can in addition be selected in the
DVD-specific menu.
Please note the options in the information on your DVD.
<
Notes
The DVD changer can play the following formats:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA – Audio CD
The DVD-audio format is not supported by the
DVD changer. However, many conventional audio DVDs include a video track in DVD video format as well as the audio track. These DVDs can be played on the DVD changer. The information on your DVD determines whether your audio DVD has an additional video track.
DVDs are usually subdivided into titles and chapters, and may contain various subtitles, camera angles or sound tracks, languages and sound formats. Depending on the DVD's type, these functions can either be selected directly via the DVD control or only via the DVD-specific menu. Please note the options in the information on your DVD.
Dual-sided DVDs available commercially are coated on both sides and are unlabelled. Both sides consequently carry information. To access the information on the second side, remove the magazine and turn the DVD over.
Safety notes
The BMW DVD changer is officially designated a Class 1 laser product. Never use it if the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries.
Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subsequently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the temperatures to which these media are exposed during playing, and could damage the system irreparably.
Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm, approx. 5 in, and do not use
CDs/DVDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g.
CD singles, otherwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be impossible to eject.
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVD
Plus
, otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impossible to eject.
<
General malfunctions
The BMW DVD changer is optimised for the operation inside the vehicle. It may react with more sensitivity to defective CDs/DVDs than devices for stationary application.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it is correctly inserted into the drive.
Atmospheric humidity
Due to high atmospheric humidity the CD/DVD or the focusing lens for laser beam can be misty and as a result it may be impossible to play it for a while.
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with individual CDs/
DVDs, this can have one of the following causes.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Causes of malfunctions with self-recorded
CDs/DVDs are, e.g. non-uniform data-creation and copying methods as well as low quality or rapid ageing of the blank disc being used.
Only write on the upper side of CDs/DVDs using a special marker pen.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid causing fingerprints and protect against dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a case.
Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures in excess of 50 6 /122 7 , high atmospheric humidity and direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs being impossible to play, or only playable with restrictions.
Care notes
For useful information on this subject, see the booklet Looking after your car.
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This chapter summarises all the various options for mobile communication with family, friends, business partners or service providers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Overview of the telephone *
The principle
Your BMW is fitted with a mobile phone provision. As soon as you have performed a onceonly logging-on procedure in the vehicle with a suitable mobile phone, you will also be able to operate it via iDrive, via the button on the steering wheel, via the retractable telephone keypad and by voice input * .
A mobile phone that has previously been logged on is automatically identified again as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running. The logon data of up to four mobile phones can be retained simultaneously. If more than one mobile phone is identified at the same time, the last mobile phone to have been logged on can be operated via the vehicle.
To avoid malfunctions, do not operate a mobile phone that has been identified by the vehicle via the phone's buttons.
The mobile phone can be operated via:
> The button on the steering wheel, see
> The retractable telephone keypad, see
>
iDrive, see Calling up communication, page 200
> The voice input system * , see page
Please consult the separate operating instructions for details of how to operate your mobile phone.
For your safety
Only make inputs when the traffic situation permits. Do not conduct phone calls with the mobile phone in your hand while driving; use the hands-free unit instead. You could otherwise be distracted and put both the occupants of your car and other road users at risk.
<
Phoning in the car
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for your mobile phone, is inserted in the centre armrest.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the snap-in adapter, from radio readiness the battery is recharged and the mobile phone is connected to the car's external aerial. This will assure better network reception and consistent sound quality. BMW Service knows for which mobile phones holders are available.
Inserting the snap-in adapter, see page
BMW advises against the use of mobile phones or other mobile communication devices inside the car, unless they are directly connected to an outside aerial. Mutual interference between the vehicle's electronics and such equipment cannot be entirely ruled out.
There is moreover no guarantee that the radiation generated when such devices are transmitting will be dissipated out of the vehicle's interior.
<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask BMW Service for details of which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone provision or for which mobile phones snap-in adapters are available. In conjunction with a specific software status, these mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Handbook. Malfunctions could occur with other types of mobile phones.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Hands-free unit Telephone keypad, retractable
You can operate basic functions of the mobile phone via the keypad without needing to hold the mobile phone.
Calls are automatically directed via the handsfree unit.
Ejecting
Press telephone keypad 1 .
It is ejected.
The hands-free microphone is located on the roof lining.
The hands-free unit is switched on when you make or answer a call with the following equipment items:
> The button on the steering wheel, see
> The retractable telephone keypad
>
iDrive, see Calling up communication, page 200
> The voice input system * , see page
, not for incoming calls
Adjusting volume
You can adjust the volume for the hands-free unit and the ring tone separately:
The telephone keypad cannot be removed.
<
Controls
2
> Turn the knob during a call.
> Turn the knob during an incoming call.
The volume can also be adjusted via the buttons on the steering wheel.
<
This volume is retained even if you set other audio sources to minimum values.
The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use.
3
4
To reject or terminate a call.
Press briefly: the last digit entered is deleted.
Press and hold down: the complete sequence of digits is deleted.
To answer or start making a call.
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5 To enter digits 1-9.
6
7
To enter special characters.
To enter digit 0.
8 Press briefly: to enter special characters.
Press and hold down * : pause for
DTMF suffix dialling.
DTMF suffix dialling
DTMF suffix dialling enables you to access network services or use them for controlling devices, e.g. for remote monitoring of an answering machine. You need a corresponding combination of digits or characters, the DTMF code, to access this feature.
DTMF suffix dialling is available to you once a connection has been established.
1.
Enter phone number.
2.
Press the nection.
button to establish the con-
3.
Press and hold down the button.
4.
Enter the appropriate digits or characters of the DTMF code.
Each digit or character is transmitted immediately and confirmed by a tone.
Inserting
Insert telephone keypad until it engages.
Emergency call*
Conditions for making an emergency call, see page
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Initial operation
Snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for your mobile phone, is inserted in the centre armrest.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the snap-in adapter, from radio readiness the battery is recharged and the mobile phone is connected to the car's external aerial. This will assure better network reception and consistent sound quality. BMW Service knows for which mobile phones holders are available.
Inserting
1.
Press the buttons to open the covers in the centre armrest.
3.
Insert the snap-in adapter at the top, arrow 3 , and press its lower section forwards, arrow 4 .
Removing
Press the area around the button, arrows 1 , and remove the snap-in adapter, arrow 2 .
2.
Press the area around the button, arrows 1 , and remove the cover, arrow 2 .
Inserting mobile phone
If you insert the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or remove it from the adapter during a call, the call may be interrupted depending on the type of mobile phone.
1.
Press the buttons to open the covers in the centre armrest.
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
2.
Remove the protective cap from the mobile phone's aerial connector if necessary, so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
3.
Push the mobile phone down towards the electrical connections, arrow 1 , and press it forwards, arrow 2 , until it engages.
The mobile phone is charged from the car's radio readiness position onwards, see charge display on mobile phone.
Mobile phone removal
To remove the mobile phone, depending on type:
> Press the button.
> Slide the button up.
> The mobile phone must be on standby.
> The Bluetooth link with the vehicle and the mobile phone must have been activated.
> Depending on the mobile phone type, it may be necessary to preset the mobile phone, e.g. locating, linking up or logging on
Bluetooth device, see operating instructions for your mobile phone.
Only log on the mobile phone while the vehicle is at a standstill, so as not to endanger the vehicle's occupants and other road users as a result of being distracted.
<
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Phone" and press the controller.
4.
Select "PAIRING" and press the controller.
The three LEDs in the status line, see
, flash.
The mobile phone can also be logged onto the vehicle via "Communication". Follow the instructions on the control display when logging on.
<
Logging a mobile phone onto the vehicle
To log your mobile phone onto the vehicle, you need a special Bluetooth passkey. It is supplied together with the on-board literature.
The following conditions must be met:
> The ignition must be switched on.
Establishing link between mobile phone and vehicle
5.
Further procedures must be performed on the mobile phone; these may vary depending on the phone's model, see operating instructions for your mobile phone, e.g. under locating, linking up or pairing Bluetooth device.
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
6.
Enter and confirm the Bluetooth passkey via your mobile phone's keypad.
After successfully logging on, the name of your mobile phone is shown on the control display.
The next time you use the mobile phone within
Bluetooth range of the vehicle, it will be identified within a short time provided the ignition is switched on.
As soon as a mobile phone is identified by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card and/or in your mobile phone are transferred to your vehicle. Which entries are transferred depends on your mobile phone, see operating instructions for your mobile phone if applicable, and the process may take several minutes.
Each time the link is established, the phone book entries already stored in the vehicle are compared with the phone book entries currently stored on the mobile phone. The details held by the vehicle are amended or deleted as appropriate.
Up to four mobile phones can be logged on in succession. If you log on a fifth mobile phone, you must first erase the logon data for one of the other mobile phones, see Logging off a mobile phone from the vehicle.
from the list. The phone book entries stored in the vehicle are likewise deleted.
Activating/deactivating
Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe the legal requirements in the country in which you are travelling.
Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary.
<
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Phone" and press the controller.
4.
Select "BLUETOOTH" and press the controller.
Logging off a mobile phone from the vehicle
If you no longer wish to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon data for that mobile phone.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Settings".
3.
Select "Phone" and press the controller.
4.
Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
5.
Select "YES" and press the controller.
The logged-off mobile phone is deleted
> LED next to "BLUETOOTH" lights up green:
Bluetooth link is activated.
> LED next to "BLUETOOTH" does not light up:
Bluetooth link is deactivated.
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
You have the option of conducting a phone call via various items of equipment on the vehicle:
> The button on the steering wheel, see page
> The retractable telephone keypad, see page
>
iDrive, see Calling up communication
> The voice input system * , see page
The phone number will then be displayed in the top status line, see page
If the ignition is switched off, you can continue a conversation already in progress for a maximum of 16 minutes via the hands-free unit.
Requirements
> The logon data for the mobile phone must have been stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone must be operational.
> The ignition must be switched on.
> The mobile phone is identified by the vehicle.
Calling up communication
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Communication".
Receiving a call
If you have stored the caller's number in the phone book and the callers do not withhold their number, the name under which the entry is stored is displayed.
Accepting a call
> Press the button on the steering wheel
> Press the button on the retractable telephone keypad
> Select the symbol on the control display and press the controller.
The phone number or name is displayed in the status line.
Rejecting a call
> Press the button on the retractable telephone keypad
> Select the symbol on the control display and press the controller.
Ending a call
> Press the button on the steering wheel
> Press the button on the retractable telephone keypad
> Select the symbol on the control display and press the controller.
Making a call
Dialling a phone number and establishing a connection
Telephone keypad, retractable
1.
Enter phone number.
2.
Press the button.
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Voice input system*
Digits from zero to nine are understood. You can say each digit individually or say them in groups, to speed up the input process:
1.
{ Dial phone number } .
2.
Say the phone number.
3.
{ Dial } .
Once the last sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete that sequence:
1.
{ Correction } .
2.
Correct the phone number.
All digits entered so far are deleted with { Delete number } :
1.
{ Delete number } .
2.
The phone number is deleted.
Redialling
> Press the button on the steering wheel
> Press the button on the retractable telephone keypad
Via the voice input system:
{ Redial } .
Dialling phone number from phone book or from a list
Phone numbers you have dialled, missed calls and entries in the phone book on the SIM card or in the phone itself are stored in the form of lists if the mobile phone is linked up to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in the phone book, the name given to the entry instead of the phone number is displayed.
The following lists are available:
> "Top 8":
In the Top 8 list, the eight telephone numbers that have been dialled most frequently from the phone book are stored automatically. The subscriber most frequently dialled is at the top of the list.
> "Last":
The last eight phone numbers you have dialled are stored automatically. The phone number most recently dialled is at the top of the list.
> "A-Z":
The entries in the phone book on the SIM card or the phone itself, comprising a name and a phone number, are displayed arranged in alphabetical order.
> "Missed":
The phone numbers of the last eight calls that went unanswered are stored if the callers' phone numbers have been transmitted.
A missed call is indicated by an envelope symbol in the top status line.
Dialling a phone number from the phone book
The "A-Z" list is available to you for your phone book entries. The entries of the phone book on the SIM card or mobile phone are displayed to you on the control display; they are arranged in alphabetical order.
1.
Select "A-Z" and press the controller.
The phone book entries are displayed in alphabetical order on the right-hand side of the control display.
2.
Select the desired entry and press the controller.
3.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
The selected subscriber is called. The phone number appears in the top status line.
The connection can also be established via the button on the steering wheel or the telephone keypad.
<
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Dialling a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1.
Select the list and press the controller.
> "Top 8"
> "Last"
> "Missed"
2.
Select the desired entry and press the controller.
3.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
The selected subscriber is called.
The phone number appears in the top status line.
The connection can also be established via the button on the steering wheel or the telephone keypad.
<
Deleting entries in lists
You can delete the lists of the phone numbers you have dialled most frequently, lists of missed calls and lists of numbers dialled most recently.
1.
Select the desired list and press the controller.
The stored entries are displayed on the right side of the control display.
2.
Select symbol and press the controller to delete all current entries.
3.
Select "YES" and press the controller.
The entries are deleted.
Voice-activated phone book*
You can create a separate voice-activated phone book with up to 50 entries via the voice input system. You must first enter all entries by voice input. You cannot call up iDrive phone book entries via the voice-activated system.
Creating new entry in voice-activated phone book
Say the phone number in blocks of between three and six digits. An entry always consists of a name and a phone number:
1.
{ Save name } .
2.
Say the name and repeat it if asked to do so.
3.
Say the phone number.
4.
{ Save } .
Reading out entries
You can have all entries in your voice-activated phone book read out in the order in which they have been input, and select a particular entry to establish the connection:
{ Read out } .
> To browse forward:
{ Next }
> To browse backward:
{ Previous }
> To repeat entry:
{ Repeat }
> To call:
{ Dial }
Dialling from the voice-activated phone book
You can dial a saved entry via the name and the phone number:
1.
{ Dial name } .
2.
Say the name.
3.
{ Dial } .
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Deleting entry from voice-activated phone book
You can delete individual entries from the voice-activated phone book:
1.
{ Telephone } .
2.
{ Delete entry } .
3.
Say the name.
4.
Confirm with { Yes } .
Deleting all entries in voice-activated phone book
You can delete all entries in the phone book:
1.
{ Telephone } .
2.
{ Delete telephone book } .
3.
Confirm twice with { Yes } .
From the hands-free unit to the mobile phone
If you are conducting a conversation via the hands-free unit, you may also be able to continue the conversation via the mobile phone.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "Communication".
3.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Switching between mobile phone and hands-free unit
You can switch from the mobile phone to the hands-free unit, and vice versa, during a call.
From mobile phone to hands-free unit
You can continue conversations that you started out of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free unit if the engine is running or the ignition switched on.
To do this, insert your mobile, which has already been logged onto the vehicle, into the snap-in adapter, see page
Depending on your mobile phone, changeover to the hands-free operation may take place automatically.
For mobile phones that do not change over automatically to hands-free operation:
> Press the snap-in adapter.
button at the top of the
> Depending on mobile phone type, you may also be able to continue the conversation via the hands-free unit. Go by the mobile phone's display, see operating instructions for your mobile phone.
4.
Take the mobile phone out of the snap-in
.
You can continue the conversation on your mobile phone.
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
TeleService , BMW Assist *
TeleService
TeleService assists you with communicating with BMW Service. Data about your vehicle's service status or about legally required inspections can be transmitted over the Business mobile phone provision directly to BMW Service. This is the same data that is stored in the remote control unit as the basis for Condition
Based Service CBS. BMW Service can then contact you to arrange an appointment at your convenience, wherever you happen to be. The advantage for you is that BMW Service knows in advance what maintenance work will be required. The TeleService functions are country-specific: the data on the service status of your car or on statutory inspections is transmitted either automatically when servicing is imminent, or while you call BMW Service, depending on the country of use. Further information is available from BMW Service.
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with further services over and above TeleService, such as an information service that can provide you with addresses. If an emergency call is placed, the details of your car's location are transmitted to the BMW Assist emergency call centre.
Many BMW Assist functions depend on the individually agreed contract. The transfer of data, e.g. for Condition Based Service CBS, varies from country to country.
You can likewise access BMW Assist services over the Internet. The range available is constantly being extended.
When your contract expires, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated; you will not have to contact BMW Service. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, you will no longer be able to access BMW Assist services. You can reactivate the BMW Assist system by taking out a new contract with BMW Service.
Requirements
You will be able to use TeleService or BMW
Assist if the following conditions are met:
> Your car is fitted with a Business mobile phone provision. This means that the car has a built-in SIM card.
> There is mobile phone network coverage.
> The mobile phone network selected automatically must support the services.
> GPS reception is assured for transmitting the data.
> For BMW Assist: you have applied to BMW
Service or BMW Customer Service to use
BMW Assist.
The vehicle must be able to determine your current location in order to transfer position data.
This can be displayed on the control display.
Initialising TeleService or BMW Assist
In order to make use of TeleService or BMW
Assist, first initialise the system.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Status" and press the controller.
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Select "BMW Assist" and press the controller.
5.
Select "INITIALISE" and press the controller.
The system runs through four phases in order to establish contact with BMW Service and the services you have chosen.
Initialising takes up to 9 minutes. The status is indicated on the control display. During initialising, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive. Initialising continues in the background.
Please leave the ignition switched on while the system is being initialised.
BMW Assist services cannot be called up until the system has been initialised.
To ensure that the data can be transferred, initialising must be performed while the car is stationary.
<
If you have not yet applied to use BMW Assist, the process is interrupted; you can be put through to a BMW operator to request information on how to apply. Your mobile phone must first be logged onto the vehicle, see page
Once initialising has been successfully completed, the system switches to the overview of services available.
Services available
The following special factors apply to the Tele-
Service and BMW Assist services:
> The actual services available may vary from country to country.
> Depending on the specification and country of use, voice contact is established or data are transferred. In certain countries, both are possible.
> The data transferred may comprise your vehicle data, your current location or data for Condition Based Service CBS.
Automatic Service notification*
The data on the service status of your car or on statutory inspections is transmitted automatically when a service or inspection is imminent.
You can check when BMW Service was notified.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Service Status" and press the controller.
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
"Automatic notification of service requirements is initiated if service work is required.
You can check the current status here."
4.
Select "Breakdown Service" and press the controller.
The car's current location is displayed.
5.
Select "Status" and press the controller.
If necessary, your BMW dealer is informed.
5.
Select "START" and press the controller.
6.
Select arrow and press the controller to hide the display.
Breakdown recovery
You can contact the BMW Group's breakdown service if you require assistance in the event of a breakdown.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.
BMW Service passes on details of the vehicle's current location, the customer profile and other vehicle data to the Mobile Service responsible.
Voice contact is established.
In certain countries, the data for Condition
Based Service CBS and your current location are transmitted at the same time if BMW Assist is enabled.
Contacting BMW Service or the
BMW Customer Service
You can contact your home BMW Service, e.g. to arrange a service appointment.
Your mobile phone must be logged onto the vehicle if you wish to establish contact with BMW Service or with BMW Customer
Service.
<
For all information concerning your car, contact the BMW Customer Service.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.
4.
Select the desired service and press the controller.
> "Your BMW dealer"
> "Customer Service"
The nearest company providing BMW
Service in the vicinity of your current location is displayed.
The car's current location is displayed.
5.
Select "START" and press the controller.
In certain countries, the data for Condition
Based Service CBS and your current location are transmitted at the same time if TeleService or BMW Assist have been enabled.
Contact can be established even if TeleService has not been enabled.
Contacting the nearest BMW Service*
You can request the navigation system to display the locations of BMW Service outlets in your vicinity.
You can call a BMW Service or transfer its address to your navigation system as a destination if the navigation CD/DVD is inserted.
Your mobile phone must be logged onto the vehicle if you wish to establish contact with the nearest BMW Service.
<
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Nearest dealer" and press the controller.
To call a BMW Service outlet:
5.
Select "CALL" and press the controller.
A telephone connection is established with the BMW Service outlet.
To adopt a BMW Service outlet as a destination for the navigation system:
6.
Select "AS DEST." and press the controller.
The BMW Service outlet is selected as the destination and the route guidance is switched on.
Traffic Information Plus traffic information*
This service constitutes an extended traffic information service.
With BMW Assist enabled, you can call up current traffic information via Traffic Information
Plus.
You can call up traffic information manually via iDrive. Traffic information is represented on the route map and automatically flashed up during
route guidance, see Calling up traffic information manually on page 150
.
If you wish to be supplied with Traffic Information Plus data, its transmission must be switched on.
Switching traffic information transmission on/off
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
3.
Select "Traffic info" and press the controller.
If "Traff.info Plus" is switched on, then
"Vi+" will be displayed in the top status line, see page
.
<
Selecting categories
You can hide certain types of messages in the traffic information message list.
1.
Select "Categories" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Traff.info Plus" and press the controller.
Traffic information can be transmitted.
Displaying message list
You can have the latest traffic information displayed.
1.
Select "Messages" and press the controller.
You can limit the scope of the traffic information displayed to the type that is of interest to you, e.g."Traffic", "Roadworks" or
"Roads closed".
Current traffic information is transmitted and displayed.
2.
Select the desired traffic information and press the controller.
The categories of traffic information are displayed.
2.
Select the desired category and press the controller.
The traffic information for the category selected is displayed.
Traffic information affecting the selected route cannot be hidden. For your safety, traffic information alerting you to a potential hazard, such as objects on the carriageway, cannot be hidden.
<
Detailed traffic information is shown.
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Information
This information service supplies you with a wide range of topical, interesting information on request.
You can call up phone numbers and addresses, then dial such a phone number directly or transfer an address to the navigation system for route guidance.
This option gives you access to an up-to-date information service, for example for the following categories:
> Trade information e.g. florists, doctors
> Overnight stay e.g. hotels, motels
> Mobility e.g. filling stations, airports, car hire, BMW dealers
> Food and drinks e.g. restaurants, cafés, pubs
> Current events e.g. cinema listings, forthcoming events.
Calling up information
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Info Service" and press the controller.
4.
Select "New information" and press the controller.
You are put in contact with a member of the
BMW Information Service, who will give you the information you require. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you. Bookings can be made directly by the
BMW Information Service at many hotels.
The desired information and the corresponding address are displayed on the control display.
You can for instance call the number displayed, or transfer the address to the navigation system for route guidance:
> Select "CALL" and press the controller.
Your mobile phone must be logged onto the vehicle if you wish to dial one of the phone numbers displayed directly.
<
The displayed phone number will be dialled.
> Select "AS DEST." and press the controller.
The address will be transferred to the navigation system.
My Info*
This service enables you to have text messages sent to your car via the BMW Assist homepage.
iDrive, principle, see page 14
.
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "My Info" and press the controller.
4.
Select and press the controller.
A list of received short messages is displayed on the right-hand side of the control display.
Unread short messages are depicted by a closed envelope symbol.
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select the desired short message from the displayed list and press the controller.
Adapting TeleService or
BMW Assist
Displaying services
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Status" and press the controller.
The short message will be opened.
4.
Select "Services" and press the controller.
> "REPLY" replies to the short message.
> "AS DEST." transfers the address from the navigation system to route guidance.
> "CALL" dials the phone number displayed.
Your mobile phone must first be logged
onto the vehicle, see page 198
.
> "DELETE" deletes the short message.
> exits from the short message.
Press arrow or turn the controller to the left or right to exit the list.
The current TeleService or BMW Assist services are displayed.
Updating services
You will be notified if the scope of TeleService or BMW Assist changes. In this instance, you should update the services.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Status" and press the controller.
4.
Select "BMW Assist" and press the controller.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5.
Select "UPDATE" and press the controller.
Updating takes several minutes.
Calling up vehicle data
With TeleService or BMW Assist enabled, you can have your car's colour designation, registration number and Vehicle Identification
Number displayed.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "Status" and press the controller.
4.
Select "Vehicle" and press the controller.
The data stored for your vehicle is displayed.
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Online *
You can e.g. pick up your e-mails or the latest news with BMW Online.
Further services are in addition available to you over the Internet, e.g.:
> You can set up bookmarks for services that you wish to use frequently in the car.
> You can enter addresses that you wish to call up in the vehicle.
Detailed information about BMW Online services is available from BMW Service.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "BMW Online" and press the controller.
Requirements
If the following conditions are met, you can use
BMW Online:
> You have registered for BMW Online with
BMW Service.
> Your car is fitted with a Business mobile phone provision. This means that the car has a built-in SIM card.
> During the registration process, the SIM card for the mobile phone number quoted in the contract must be able to receive text messages/SMS.
> The mobile phone network selected automatically must support the services.
> For certain services, e.g. information on current location, the vehicle must be able to determine your current location.
> The ignition must be switched on.
> The mobile phone must be on standby.
Registering BMW Online
You must register for various BMW Online services and be sent your personal password by text message/SMS.
4.
Select "ACCEPT" and press the controller.
If you register on a second or subsequent occasion, for a secondary user, in addition select "Registration" and press the controller.
<
5.
Confirm the phone number shown.
6.
Select arrow and press the controller to end BMW Online.
The password is sent immediately by SMS to the mobile phone number quoted in the contract.
7.
After receiving the password, start BMW
Online immediately, see Starting BMW
You can designate further users of BMW
Online over the Internet. These secondary users have restricted access to services in the vehicle, to the Internet or to a WAP mobile.
When secondary users register, their password is sent by text message/SMS to the mobile phone number quoted on the Internet.
<
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Starting BMW Online
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "BMW Assist".
3.
Select "BMW Online" and press the controller.
4.
Select "ACCEPT" and press the controller.
5.
Select user name and press the controller.
6.
To enable you to use BMW Online in a different vehicle, e.g. a courtesy car:
Select "Guest user" and press the controller, then enter the user ID in the same way as the password.
7.
To enter the password, select the characters individually and press the controller each time.
Each character of the password is represented by an asterisk on the control display.
> Enter blank spaces:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Delete last letter:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Cancel selection:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Only letters and digits are permitted for your password.
<
8.
Select the password that is displayed in the lower half of the control display by means of asterisks and press the controller.
You are logged onto the portal.
You can save the password and start BMW
Online merely by entering your user ID.
If you have forgotten your password, you can obtain a new one over the Internet.
<
GPRS*
GPRS, General Packet Radio Service, permits the swifter transfer of data. If possible, the data for BMW Online is transferred via GPRS. If transfer via GPRS is temporarily unavailable, the system alerts you to this. The system can establish the connection without GPRS.
Using services
1.
Select the desired menu item.
2.
Press the controller.
Controls
Return to the previous page.
Update page.
Call up start page.
Interrupt loading of page.
To adjust settings:
> "Standard settings":
To restore the manufacturer's settings.
> "Empty cache":
To empty the browser's buffer memory.
> "Reset connection data":
To reset the dial-up data for the portal to the manufacturer's settings.
> "Back":
Quit .
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
When the time comes to sell your vehicle, first select the "Standard settings".
<
Interrupting BMW Online
You can interrupt BMW Online temporarily in order to call up a different Assist service:
Select "Pause BMW Online" and press the controller.
To resume use of BMW Online:
Select "BMW Online".
Switching off BMW Online
Select "Terminate BMW Online" and press the controller.
The connection with BMW Online is automatically ended if:
> No user activity is detected for approx.
15 minutes
> The ignition is switched off
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
To assist you in preserving your car's mobility, this section contains important information on operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenance and minor repairs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Refuelling
Fuel filler flap
Briefly press the rear edge to open and close.
Manual release
In the event of a malfunction, you can unlock the fuel filler flap manually:
1.
Open the flap on the right in the luggage compartment by lifting the handle on the flap.
2.
Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol out of its holder; pull this knob to disengage the fuel filler flap.
Note when refuelling
When handling fuel, comply with the safety regulations displayed by garages and filling stations.
<
Place the tank cap in the holder on the fuel filler flap.
When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle during refuelling, otherwise
> the supply of fuel will be cut off prematurely
> fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less effectively
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out for the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 88 litres, approx. 19.4 gal, including reserve of:
> 730i/Li, 730d/Ld: approx. 8 litres, approx.
1.8 gal
> 740i/Li, 750i/Li and 745d: approx. 10 litres, approx. 2.2 gal
> 760i/Li: approx. 12 litres, approx. 2.6 gal
If the range is below 50 km, approx.
30 miles, refuel the car, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.
<
Closing tank cap
Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is clearly heard to click into place.
Do not crush the strap on the tank cap sage between the cap and the vehicle. A mes-
* will appear if the cap is loose or missing.
<
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Fuel grade
Petrol engine
Never use fuel containing lead as this will damage the catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel consisting of 85 Ξ ethanol or Flex Fuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.
<
The petrol should be sulphur-free or at least ultra-low sulphur. Since the engine has a knock control function, it can run on different grades of fuel.
> Super Plus/premium plus, 98 RON.
Fill up with fuel of this grade to achieve the nominal performance and fuel consumption values.
> You can also run the engine on:
Premium-grade unleaded fuel, 95 RON.
This fuel is also known as:
DIN EN 228 or Eurosuper.
> The minimum permissible grade is:
Regular-grade unleaded fuel, 91 RON.
Do not fill the tank with any petrol below the minimum specified grade. Otherwise the engine could be damaged.
<
National-market versions supplied to run on leaded fuel*
This specification enables you to run the car on leaded fuel, in addition to the grades listed above: the minimum grade is likewise 91 RON.
Diesel engine
Do not refuel any rape seed methyl ester
– RME –, green diesel or petrol. After refuelling a wrong fuel, do not start the engine, otherwise there is danger of engine damage.
<
After refuelling wrong fuel, do not drive further and get in contact with the BMW Service.
> Your BMW's engine is rated to run on:
Diesel oil to DIN EN 590 standard.
The filler neck has been designed for filling from diesel fuel pumps.
<
Winter-grade diesel
To ensure that the diesel engine operates reliably during the cold season of the year, it must be run on winter-grade diesel oil, which garages usually sell during the period in question. Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equipment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during operation.
Do not incorporate any additives, including petrol, as these could cause damage to the engine.
<
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressures
Information for your safety
The condition of the tyres and maintenance of the correct tyre pressures not only influence tyre life but are also decisive factors in ride quality and above all in road safety.
Checking pressures
Check and adjust the tyre pressures
– including the spare wheel – on a regular basis, but at least twice a month and before setting out on any long journey. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely affect the car's roadholding and cause tyre damage, which could result in an accident.
<
After correcting tyre pressures, reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see page
.
<
Tyre pressure values
Note tyre size
These tyre pressures apply to sizes of tyre approved by BMW and makes of tyre recommended by BMW; details are available from
BMW Service.
Condition of tyres
Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the presence of foreign bodies, unusual wear and sufficient tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not be allowed to drop below 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in. Below a tread depth of 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in, there is an increased risk of aquaplaning when driving on wet roads at fairly high speeds.
Below a tread depth of 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in, winter tyres become noticeably less suitable for winter driving conditions. New tyres should be fitted in the interests of safety.
The tyre pressures for the approved tyre sizes are visible on the driver's door post, with the driver's door open.
If you do not see any tyre pressures listed for your tyres' speed code, observe the tyre pressures for the corresponding size, e.g.
225/60 R 17.
Tyre pressures for trailer towing
For trailer towing, the tyre pressures for the higher load apply.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tyre's circumference; the letters TWI – Tread Wear Indicator – on the tyre's flanks identify tyres that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tyre tread has worn down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 1.6 mm, approx. 1/16 in, has been reached.
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Tyre damage
Unusual vibration while the car is being driven could indicate a tyre fault or some other defect on your car. This may have been caused e.g. by driving over a kerb or similar. The same applies to any other abnormal road behaviour, such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In such cases, reduce speed immediately and have the wheels and tyres checked without delay. Proceed with caution to the nearest BMW Service or specialist tyre dealer that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. Have the car towed there if necessary.
Tyre damage represents a risk of serious injury to the car's occupants and to all other road users.
<
Age of tyres
For a variety of reasons, including the tendency of tyres to become brittle along with increasing age, BMW recommends that new tyres be fitted after not more than 6 years, irrespective of the actual level of wear. This also applies to the tyre on the spare wheel.
A tyre's date of manufacture is included in the inscription on the tyre:
DOT ... 3506 means that the tyre was manufactured in week 35 of 2006.
Run-flat tyres*
subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurised.
On further driving with damaged tyres, see Indication of a flat tyre on page 88 .
New wheels and tyres
Have new wheels and tyres fitted only by
BMW Service or by a specialist tyre dealer that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.
<
Retreaded tyres
BMW advises against the use of retreaded tyres, as these could adversely affect the car's safety. Their carcasses may differ in internal construction or have aged sufficiently to limit their durability.
<
The right wheels and tyres
BMW recommends fitting only wheels and tyres that it has approved for your type of vehicle, otherwise the tyres may e.g. make contact with the vehicle body due to impermissible tolerances, even though they are of an approved size; this could result in a serious accident. BMW is unable to assess the suitability of wheels and tyres it has not approved and cannot therefore guarantee their safety.
<
Details of the correct wheel and tyre combinations can be obtained from BMW Service.
The correct wheel and tyre combination also has an influence on various systems, which could otherwise malfunction, for instance ABS and DSC.
To maintain the car's good road behaviour, always fit tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all wheels. After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original wheel and tyre combination again as soon as possible.
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tyres comprise a semi self-supporting tyre and a special rim. The reinforced sections ensure that the tyre can continue to be used
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Recommended makes of tyre
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by
BMW for each tyre size. You can recognise these by the clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tyre.
When properly used, these tyres meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.
Run-flat tyres
When mounting new tyres or replacing summer with winter tyres or conversely, use tyres with run-flat properties for your own safety. In the event of a puncture there is moreover no spare wheel at your disposal. Your BMW Service will be pleased to advise.
In the interests of safety, BMW recommends that damaged run-flat tyres be replaced rather than repaired.
<
Special characteristics of winter tyres
BMW recommends you to fit winter tyres if the car is used for driving in wintry conditions.
Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking have better winter characteristics than summer tyres, they do not normally match the performance of winter tyres.
Note the speed limit applicable to these tyres
Do not exceed the maximum speed laid down for the winter tyres fitted to your car, otherwise the tyres could become damaged and this could result in an accident.
<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tyre dealers and BMW Service can supply these labels.
Tyre storage
Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and preferably dark place when not in use. Protect tyres against contamination from oil, grease and fuel.
Interchanging front and rear wheels
BMW advises against interchanging the front and rear wheels, as this could impair their handling characteristics.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. BMW Service is able to provide the details of these makes. Such chains may be used only as a pair, with winter tyres fitted at the rear. When fitting, comply with the snow chain manufacturer's instructions. When driving with chains, do not exceed a speed of 50 km/h, approx. 30 mph.
Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator if snow chains are fitted, as the instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When travelling with snow chains it can be helpful to activate DTC briefly, see page
.
<
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
In the engine compartment
Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.
<
Closing
Engine compartment lid
Releasing
Close the engine compartment lid with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
To avoid injuries, as when closing doors or other lids on the car, make sure that the closing range of the engine compartment lid is unobstructed.
If you notice during the journey that the engine compartment lid has not been properly closed, stop the car at the earliest possible moment and close it correctly.
<
Pull the lever on the left beneath the instrument panel.
Opening
Pull the release lever and open the lid.
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2
Filler neck for engine oil, see Adding engine oil
3 Vehicle Identification Number
4 Body earth, minus pole
5 Coolant expansion tank, on 730d/Ld, 745d
6
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving style and the operating conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.
In order to maximise the precision of the oil level indicator, the measurement needs to be taken with the engine at operating temperature, in other words after driving uninterrupted for at least 10 km, approx. 6 miles. You can have the oil level displayed whilst driving or when parked on a level surface with the engine running.
You can have the current oil level displayed on the control display.
iDrive, principle, see page 14 .
1.
Press the menu.
button to call up the start
2.
Move the controller towards "On-board data".
3.
Select and press the controller.
The oil level is displayed.
Turn the controller to exit the list.
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Possible displays
> "Update of engine oil level in process".
> "Engine oil level OK".
> "Oil level at minimum: Add 1 litre engine oil": top up with no more than 1 litre, approx.
2 pints, of engine oil at the next opportunity,
see Adding engine oil further below.
> "Oil level under min.: Add 1 litre engine oil": top up with no more than 1 litre, approx.
2 pints, of engine oil at the next opportunity,
see Adding engine oil further below.
> "Engine oil level too high".
Have the car examined immediately, otherwise too much oil could result in engine damage.
<
> "No measurement currently possible".
Adding engine oil
Only top up with oil if a Check Control message is displayed.
Top up the oil level within the next
200 km, approx. 120 miles, otherwise the engine may suffer damage.
<
Keep all oils, greases etc. out of the reach of children and read and comply with any warning instructions on the containers, to avoid any health risks.
<
Oil change
Have oil changes performed either by BMW
Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil is a decisive factor for the correct operation and long life of your car's engine. On the basis of extensive tests,
BMW regularly approves specific grades of engine oil.
BMW Service or a workshop operating to
BMW specifications and with suitably trained personnel will be able to provide details of the oils approved for your car.
<
Do not use any oil additives, as these could in certain circumstances result in engine damage.
<
Alternative oil grades
If exceptionally none of the approved grades of oil is available, you can top up the oil level in between oil changes with other grades of oil.
The oil specification on the container must be one of the following:
Petrol engines
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-01 FE or
BMW Longlife-04
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-98 or
ACEA A3
Diesel engines
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-04
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-98 or ACEA A3/B4.
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Coolant
Do not open up the cooling system while the engine is hot, otherwise you may scald yourself on the escaping coolant steam.
<
Coolant consists of water and an antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your
BMW. BMW Service can provide details of which additives are suitable.
Use only suitable additives, otherwise the engine could incur damage. As these additives are hazardous to health, observe the notes on the containers.
<
When disposing of coolant additives, comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations.
<
Checking coolant level
1.
Let the engine cool.
2.
Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly anticlockwise until it starts to open, then allow the pressure to escape before opening it fully.
3.
The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, see also diagram next to the filler neck.
4.
If necessary, slowly top up to the correct level; do not overfill.
5.
Turn the cap to close it, ensuring it is tight.
6.
Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as soon as possible.
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System contributes towards upholding the roadworthiness and operating reliability of your BMW. It also covers comfort and convenience aspects, such as ensuring that filters for the air in the car's interior are renewed in good time. Its purpose is to optimise maintenance measures with a view to minimising the cost of looking after your car.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and advanced algorithms take account of the varying conditions in which your BMW is used. Condition Based Service uses these to determine current and future servicing requirements. The system provides you with an opportunity to tailor the scope of maintenance work to your personal standards, so that your BMW will always be reliably operational.
On the control display, you can have the remaining distances and times for selected maintenance tasks as well as any legally prescribed dates displayed to you individually, see
:
> Engine oil
> Brakes, separately for front and rear
> Microfilter
> Diesel particulate filter *
> Brake fluid
> Spark plugs
> Vehicle check
> Statutory vehicle inspections, depending on national requirements
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously saves servicerequirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advisor can read out these data from the remote control, and will propose an optimised maintenance approach on this basis. Please therefore hand the BMW Service Advisor the remote control that you last used to drive the car whenever you take it in for servicing.
Periods during which the battery was disconnected are disregarded by the CBS maintenance system. You should therefore have all items requiring time-based maintenance, such as brake fluid, and possibly also the engine oil, microfilter and activated charcoal filter, brought up to date by BMW Service.
<
Service Booklet
Further information on the maintenance routines required is provided in the Service Booklet.
BMW recommends that you have maintenance and repair work carried out by
BMW Service.
Make sure that maintenance work is confirmed in the Service Booklet after it has been carried out. These entries are evidence that your BMW has been serviced regularly and correctly.
<
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD
Internet under www.bmw.com or from your
BMW Service.
General care
Useful hints on care of your BMW are provided in the booklet Looking after your car.
Components which have a decisive effect on exhaust emissions can be tested via the OBD socket with a suitable device.
This on-board diagnosis socket is on the driver's side, on the underside of the instrument panel to the left, behind a cover.
Exhaust emission values
Warning light flashing:
Engine malfunction which may damage the catalytic converter. You may continue to drive the car but must proceed with caution. Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Warning light on:
Engine malfunction with a negative effect on emission values. Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Recycling
The very design of your car incorporates a recycling-friendly concept that extends to both the production methods used and the choice of materials.
BMW recommends that you hand in your car to a salvaging operator approved by the BMW
Group at the end of its operating life. In doing this, you will be making an active contribution towards protecting resources and the environment. The regulations concerning the returning of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to country. You can obtain more information in the
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing parts
Toolkit
You will find the toolkit in the luggage compartment lid.
Unscrew the wing bolt to remove.
The adapter for the spare key can be stored beneath the spanner.
Wiper blades
To change the wiper blades, fold them away
from the windscreen, see page 64 .
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driving safety. Adequate care and attention should therefore be taken when handling these components. BMW recommends that any routines that you are not familiar with or that are not described here be entrusted to BMW Service.
Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with the fingers, because even slight amounts of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb and reduce its working life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
<
A box containing spare bulbs is available from
BMW Service.
Before performing any work on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question, otherwise there is a risk of short-circuits.
Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk of injury or damage when changing bulbs.
<
Please see the booklet Looking after your car for notes on care of the headlights.
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Controls, displays and other equipment items inside your car have light-emitting diodes behind a cover as their light source. These
LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are classified by law as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours at a time, as this could cause irritation to the retina.
<
Xenon headlights
The operating life of these light units is extremely long and the likelihood of failure very low, provided that they are not switched on and off a very great number of times. If a xenon headlight should nonetheless fail, switch on the front fog lights and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon headlight system, including bulb-changing, performed only by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. Otherwise there is a risk of potentially fatal accidents if work is performed inexpertly, because of the high electrical voltages present.
<
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Front flashing turn indicator
The picture shows the left-hand side of the engine compartment.
Two 21 Watt bulbs: P21W or PY21W *
1.
Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it off.
2.
Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.
Side flashing turn indicators
5 Watt bulb, W5W
1.
Push the light back at its front edge with the fingertip and disengage to the front.
2.
Turn the light through 90 3 and take out.
3.
Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it off.
4.
Pull out the bulb and change it.
Rear lights
> Flashing turn indicators:
21 Watt bulb, P21W or PY21W *
> Reversing lights:
16 Watt bulb, W16W
1 Brake lights
2 Rear light
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light *
5 Reflector
6 Flashing turn indicators
Rear and brake lights
These lights use LED technology. In the event of a fault, please contact BMW Service or a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel.
Lights in the side section
Rear flashing turn indicators
The picture shows the cut-out in the luggage compartment on the left.
21 Watt bulb, P21W or PY21W *
1.
Fold the side trim down with the handle at the top.
2.
Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it off.
3.
Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lights in luggage compartment lid
1 Rear fog light
2 Reversing lights
The picture shows the left section of the luggage compartment lid.
Detach the trim in the luggage compartment lid.
Rear fog light*
21 Watt bulb, H21W
1.
Pull out the bulb holder.
2.
Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.
Reversing lights
16 Watt bulb, W16W
1.
Pull out the bulb holder.
2.
Pull out the bulb and change it.
snow, ice, tiles or similar, there is a risk of the car or the jack sliding sideways.
Position the car's jack on a firm surface.
Never place wood blocks or similar under the jack, or the maximum support capacity may not be reached due to the restricted height.
When the car is jacked up, do not lie under it or start the engine, as this could lead to a potentially fatal accident.
<
What you need
To avoid rattling noises later, please make a note of the positions of the tools when they are removed, and replace them in the same positions later.
> Wheel stud wrench
Next to the spare wheel
Changing a wheel
Safety precautions in the event of a puncture or when changing a wheel:
Park the car as far as possible from moving traffic, on a firm surface. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and engage selector lever in position P.
All occupants must leave the car and be led to a point where they are not exposed to risk, for example behind a crash barrier at the side of the road.
If necessary, set up the warning triangle * or a flashing warning light * at a sufficient distance to the rear. Comply with relevant local laws.
Only change wheels on a flat, firm and non-slip surface. On a soft or low-grip surface, such as
> Wheel chock
Next to the spare wheel or, if there is a trailer tow hitch, behind the left-hand luggage compartment trim.
Remove the floor mat and spare wheel cover.
Release wing nut and take out the wheel chock.
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
> Jack
In the luggage compartment, behind the right-hand trim panel.
Swing the trim panel down by means of the handle at the top.
Release the thumb screw and take out the jack.
After using the jack, retract it fully and clip the crank handle securely in place.
Spare wheel
1.
Release the wing nut 1 .
2.
Take out washer 2 to one side.
3.
Unscrew and remove threaded rod 3 .
Jacking up the car
1.
Position the car jack beneath the jacking point closest to the wheel that needs to be changed, with the jack base vertically beneath the jacking point and resting on the ground across its full surface.
Use the jack only for wheel changing.
Do not attempt to raise another type of vehicle or any other load with this jack; this could result in injury or damage.
<
2.
Insert the head of the jack into the rectangular recess as it is extended, see detail.
4.
Remove the spare wheel.
Preparations for changing a wheel
1.
Note the safety precautions on page
2.
Prevent the car from rolling away:
Place the wheel chock behind the front wheel on the side opposite to the wheel that is to be changed, or in front of that front wheel if the car is pointing downhill. If the car is on a significant incline, protect it additionally against rolling away.
3.
Slacken off the wheel studs by half a turn.
Thiefproof wheel studs, see page
3.
Continue to turn the crank handle until the wheel you wish to change is lifted clear of the ground.
Fitting the wheel
1.
Take out the wheel studs and remove the wheel.
2.
Remove heavy dirt deposits from the wheel and hub contact faces and clean the wheel studs.
3.
Fit the new wheel or the spare wheel and insert at least two diagonally opposed wheel studs.
If the car is not fitted with alloy wheels of the
Genuine BMW type, note that different wheel studs may be needed.
4.
Insert and screw up the remaining wheel studs, then tighten them all firmly, working across the hub rather than round it.
5.
Lower the car and remove the jack.
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
After fitting
1.
Tighten the studs alternately on opposite sides of the hub.
For safety reasons, have the wheel stud tightening torque checked without delay, using a calibrated torque wrench.
The correct tightening torque is 140 Nm, approx. 103 lb ft.
<
2.
Proceed in the reverse sequence when storing the wheel and tools.
3.
Correct the tyre pressure at the earliest opportunity.
Prevent dirt from entering the tyre valves by attaching screw-on dust caps. Dirt in the tyre valve can often lead to a gradual loss of air pressure.
<
4.
Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see
5.
Replace the damaged tyre as soon as possible and have the new wheel balanced.
Driving with the spare wheel
With certain wheel/tyre combinations, the size of the spare wheel differs from that of the other wheels. The spare wheel is suitable without restriction for driving at all loads and speeds. However, you are advised to fit a wheel/ tyre combination that matches the original specification as soon as possible.
<
Thiefproof wheel studs
Removing a wheel stud
1.
Insert adapter 2 in the wheel stud.
2.
Unscrew wheel stud 1 with the wheel stud wrench.
After screwing in, remove the adapter again and stow it away in its designated location.
The code number is embossed on the face of the adapter. Please note this number and keep the details in a safe place in the event of the adapter being lost.
Car battery
Maintenance
The battery needs no routine maintenance whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid it contains will normally last for the full operating life of the battery in temperate climates. BMW
Service will gladly advise you on all matters relating to batteries.
Recharging the battery
Recharge the battery only with the engine stopped, via the connections in the engine
compartment. Connections, see Starting with a flat battery on page 236
.
Battery switch
1 Wheel stud for adapter
2 Adapter, beneath the luggage compartment floor next to the wheel stud wrench
If the car is to remain out of use for several weeks, push the battery switch behind the right-hand side trim in the luggage compartment to the OFF position. This reduces current consumption while the car is out of use. A message appears on the info display. Observe the supplementary information on the control display.
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Disposal
After changing batteries, have any old batteries disposed of by BMW Service or take them to an official collecting point. Batteries filled with acid should be transported and stored upright. Protect batteries against falling over when in transit.
<
Power failure
After a temporary power failure, the functions of certain equipment items may be restricted, as they require reinitialising. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be reprogrammed:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory
The positions must be reprogrammed, see page
.
> Time and date
These must be updated, see page 81 .
> Radio
Stations must be entered in the memory
.
> Navigation system
Wait for full functionality to be restored, see
Inserting the navigation CD/DVD on
page
In glove box
Press the tongue on the lid forwards and fold open the lid.
You will find information about fuse assignment on the fuse chart in the compartment.
Inside the luggage compartment
Fold the right side trim down with the handle provided.
Information about fuse assignment is found on the inner side of the side panelling.
Fuses
Do not repair blown fuses or replace them with fuses with different colours or ampere ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires can cause a fire in the vehicle.
<
Reserve fuses and plastic pincers are found on the fuse holder in the luggage compartment.
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mutual aid
Emergency call*
In order to make an emergency call:
> Equipment with Business mobile phone provision. This equipment configuration permits you to make an emergency call even if a mobile phone has not been logged onto the car.
> Radio readiness or the ignition are switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged onto a mobile phone network.
> The emergency call system must be operational.
The emergency number may vary from country to country, but an emergency call can still be made using the button in most GSM networks.
Misuse of the emergency call system is a punishable offence.
Making an emergency call
1.
To open the protective cover:
Briefly press the cover flap.
2.
Press the emergency call button for at least
2 seconds.
There is an additional loudspeaker for the emergency call installed in the front passenger footwell.
If the situation permits, wait in the car until voice contact has been established. You can then provide more precise details of the situation.
With BMW Assist enabled, telephone contact is established with the BMW Assist emergency call centre. If the car's current location can be established, it is transferred to the emergency call centre.
If the LED is flashing but the emergency call centre cannot be heard over the hands-free unit, it is possible that the hands-free unit is malfunctioning. However, the emergency call centre may still be able to hear you speak.
In certain circumstances, an emergency call may be placed automatically immediately after a serious accident. Pressing the emergency call button does not interfere with an automatic emergency call.
For technical reasons, it may not be possible to make an emergency call in highly adverse conditions.
<
In order to transmit the car's position data, a navigation CD/DVD must be inserted and the GPS signal must be received.
In the event of navigation system failure, the vehicle's current location will not be transmitted.
<
If a cancel query is displayed on the control display, you can interrupt the emergency call within 5 seconds.
The LED in the button comes on. As soon as a telephone connection has been set up with the general emergency call centre, the LED flashes.
Mobile Service
The BMW Group's Mobile Service is there to assist you round the clock in the event of a breakdown, including at weekends and on public holidays.
The telephone numbers of the Mobile Service control centre for your home country are in the
Contact booklet.
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Select "BMW Assist" if you have applied for this
information service, see Breakdown recovery
on page
.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is conveniently located on the inside of the luggage compartment lid, in the toolkit holder.
First aid pouch*
The first aid pouch is likewise located in the toolkit holder.
Certain items in the first aid pouch have a limited useful life. Check the expiry dates of the contents regularly and replace any items that have expired.
Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Do not depart from the procedure described below, otherwise personal injury could result or one or both vehicles be damaged.
<
Preparations
1.
Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approximately the same capacity in Amp/h. This should be printed on the battery.
2.
Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.
3.
Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
The bodies of the two vehicles must not make contact, otherwise there is the risk of a short-circuit.
<
Connecting the jump leads
Connect the jump leads in the correct order, so that no sparks which could cause injury occur.
<
With your BMW the so-called jump-starting connection in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal. Its cap is marked +.
1.
Remove the cap from the BMW jump-starting connection, arrow 1 .
2.
Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+ jump lead to the positive battery terminal or to a jump-starting connection on the donor vehicle.
3.
Connect the other terminal clamp to the battery's positive terminal or to a jumpstarting connection on the vehicle to be started.
Starting with a flat battery
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by using two jump leads from another vehicle's battery. In the same way, you can help another car to start. Use only leads with fully insulated terminal clamps.
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
4.
Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/– lead to the battery's negative terminal or to the engine or body earth connection on the donor vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground/earth or negative terminal, arrow 2 .
5.
Connect the second terminal clamp to the battery's negative terminal or to a ground/ earth connection on the engine or body of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1.
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at an increased idle speed.
2.
Start the engine of the other vehicle in the customary way.
If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, wait several minutes until the flat battery has been recharged to a slightly greater degree.
3.
Allow the engines to run for a few minutes.
4.
Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite order from that in which they were originally attached.
Check the battery if necessary and have it recharged.
Do not use the spray products sold as starting aids.
<
Towing away and towstarting
Using towing eye
The screw-in towing eye is kept in the car's toolkit and should always be carried on the car.
It can be screwed into the front or rear end of the BMW.
Use only the towing eye supplied with the car, and make sure that it is screwed in fully and is tight. Only use the towing eye for towing on roads. Avoid lateral loads of the towing eye, e.g. do not raise the car at the towing eye. Otherwise the towing eye and the car could be damaged.
<
Access to screw thread
Press the arrow symbol to press out the cover.
Towing away
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, otherwise the steering may turn because there is no means of locking it. When the engine is not running, there is no power assistance and the brake servo is out of action. The steering and brakes will require extra effort to operate.
<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depending on local regulations. If the car's electrical system has failed, the car to be towed must be made identifiable to following vehicles, for instance by placing a notice or the warning triangle in the rear window.
Selector lever in position N. Manually
release transmission lock, see page 61
.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 70 km/h, approx. 45 mph, and a towing distance of
150 km, approx. 90 miles, otherwise the automatic transmission could incur damages.
<
Towing methods
In some countries, it is prohibited to tow another vehicle on public roads by means of a towbar or towrope.
Familiarise yourself with the relevant legislation in the country in question.
With towbar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be unable to keep the towed vehicle reliably under control.
<
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar at an angle, note the following:
> Towbar clearance may be restricted when cornering.
> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.
Only attach the towbar to the towing eye.
Attaching the towbar to other parts of the car can result in damage.
<
With towrope
Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing vehicle moves off.
For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as these will help to avoid sudden tensile loads. Only attach the towrope to the towing eye. Attaching the towrope to other parts of the car can result in damage.
<
With breakdown truck
Have the BMW transported by a breakdown truck with a hoisting frame or hoisted onto a loading platform.
Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.
<
Tow-starting
These cars cannot be tow-started.
Starting with a flat battery, see page 236
.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rectified.
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
This chapter contains the technical data, the short commands for the voice input system and the index, which will help you find specific items of information with ease.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical data
Dimensions
All measurements in mm. Value with * and lower side view: L models.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 12.1 m, approx. 39 ft 8 in; L models: 12.6 m, approx. 41 ft 4 in.
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Weights
730i/Li 740i/Li 750i/Li 760i/Li
Kerb weight, ready for road, with
75 kg, approx. 165 lb, load, tank
90 Ξ full, without optional extras
Permitted gross weight
Front axle load limit
Rear axle load limit
Roof load
Luggage compartment capacity acc. to VDA test kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
Litres
(cu ft) kg
(lb) kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
1880/1910
(4140/4210)
2385/2415
(5260/5320)
1105/1120
(2440/2470)
1340/1360
(2950/3000)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
1970/2010
(4340/4430)
1985/2025
(4380/4460)
2475/2515
(5460/5540)
1185/1205
(2610/2660)
2490/2530
(5490/5580)
1185/1205
(2610/2660)
1360/1380
(3000/3040)
1360/1380
(3000/3040)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
2180/2255
(4810/4970)
2645/2680
(5830/5910)
1270/1295
(2800/2855)
1400/1410
(3090/3110)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
Kerb weight, ready for road, with
75 kg, approx. 165 lb, load, tank
90 Ξ full, without optional extras
Permitted gross weight
Front axle load limit
Rear axle load limit
Roof load
Luggage compartment capacity acc. to VDA test kg
(lb)
Litres
(cu ft) kg
(lb) kg
(lb) kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
Do not exceed either the axle load limits or the car's gross weight limit.
730d/Ld
1975/2015
(4350/4440)
2480/2520
(5470/5560)
1190/1190
(2620/2620)
1360/1390
(3000/3060)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
745d
2115
(4460)
2620
(5580)
1275
(2810)
1400
(3090)
100
(220)
500
(17.7)
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Towing a trailer
Permitted gross weight kg
(lb)
730i/Li
2485/2515
(5480/5540)
740i/Li
2575/2615
(5680/5765)
750i/Li
2590/2630
(5710/5800)
760i/Li
2745/2780
(6050/6130)
Rear axle load limit unbraked braked, max. gradient 12 braked, max. gradient 8
Ξ
Ξ kg
(lb)
1515/1535
(3340/3380)
1515/1535
(3340/3380)
1555/1565
(3430/3450)
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases. kg
(lb) kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
1495/1515
(3295/3340)
750
(1650)
2000
(4410)
2100
(4630)
750
(1650)
2100
(4630)
2200
(4850)
750
(1650)
2100
(4630)
2300
(5070)
750
(1650)
2100
(4630)
2300
(5070)
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb)
100
(220)
100
(220)
100
(220)
100
(220)
Permitted gross weight
Rear axle load limit kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
730d/Ld
2580/2620
(5690/5780)
1515/1545
(3340/3410)
745d
2720
(6000)
1555
(3430)
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases. unbraked braked, max. gradient 12 Ξ kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
750
(1650)
2100
(4630)
750
(1650)
2100
(4630) braked, max. gradient 8 Ξ
Trailer nose weight kg
(lb) kg
(lb)
2200
(4850)
100
(220)
2300
(5070)
100
(220)
If you make full use of the quoted trailer load limit on gradients up to 12 Ξ and also wish to load the car itself up to its permissible gross weight limit, we recommend that you do not drive up gradients steeper than 10 Ξ .
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Filling capacities
Fuel tank of which reserve
730i/Li, 730d
740i/Li, 750i/Li, 745d
760i/Li
Litres (Imp. units) approx. 88 (19.4 gal) approx. 8 (1.8 gal) approx. 10 (2.2 gal) approx. 12 (2.6 gal)
Windscreen and headlight washer system approx. 6.0 (10.6 pints)
Note
Further details: page
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice input system *
Short commands enable you to perform certain functions directly irrespective of which menu
Notepad
Function
Recording a note
item is selected. Important short commands for the voice input system are listed below.
Command
{ Record note }
{ Read out note }
Navigation
Function
Displaying map view
Switching off voice output
Command
{ Route guidance on }
{ Map }
{ Scale }
{ Message on }
{ Message off }
Entertainment
Function
Sound output for entertainment systems, switch-
Command
{ Radio on } or { Audio off }
Selecting FM frequency range
Selecting AM frequency range
{ VHF } or { FM }
{ Medium wave } or { MW }
Calling up memorised radio station, see Memorising stations 165
{ Frequency 87...108 (Point 0...9) }
{ Station 1...12
}
Starting a CD
Selecting an MD track
Selecting the DVD
{ CD on }
{ Track 1...30
}
{ CD changer }
{ CD 1...6
}
{ MiniDisc on }
{ MiniDisc Track 1...30
}
{ TV on }
{ DVD on }
{ DVD 1...6
}
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Communication
Function
Dialling from the phone book
Creating new entry in voice-activated phone
Dialling from the voice-activated phone
Having entries in voice-activated phone book
Command
{ Dial phone number }
{ Redial }
{ Save name }
{ Dial name }
{ Read out }
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
From A-Z
Index
A
"ABC...", navigation
ABS Anti-lock Brake
System
ACC, see Active Cruise
Control
"ACCEPT", BMW Assist
"ACCEPT", navigation
,
Accessories, see Your individual vehicle
Accident, see
– Breakdown recovery
– Making an emergency call
– Mobile Service
Accidents, reporting, see
Making an emergency call
Activated charcoal filter
Active Cruise Control
– indicator light
– malfunction
– radar sensor
– selecting the distance
– sensor, see Malfunction
Active head restraint, front
Active seat
Active seat ventilation
Adapter for spare key
Adaptive brake light, see Twostage brake lights
Adaptive Drive
– see Dynamic Drive
– see Electronic Damping
Control EDC
Adaptive Head Light
Address
– calling up
– deleting
– saving
– saving current location
"Address book", navigation
Adjusting lumbar support
Adjusting shoulder support
Adjusting the volume
Adjustment knob, see iDrive
"Adjust volume", external audio device
Air, drying, see Switching cooling function on/off manually
Airbags
– safe seated position
Air conditioning
Air conditioning system
– rear
– with engine off
Air conditioning system, rear
"Air dist.", automatic air conditioning
,
Air distribution
– adjusting manually
– automatic
Air pressures, see Tyre pressures
Air recirculation, see
Recirculated-air mode
Air vents, see Ventilation
Air volume
– automatic air conditioning
– rear air conditioning system
Alarm system
– avoiding false alarms
Alloy wheels, care, see booklet Looking after your car
All-season tyres, see Winter tyres
"All stations", radio
"AM", radio
AM, see Radio
"ANGLE", DVD changer
Anti-freeze
– coolant
– washer fluid
Anti-lock Brake System
ABS
Anti-theft alarm system, see
Alarm system
Anti-theft protection
– see Central locking
Approved engine oils
Aquaplaning
Armrest, see Centre armrest
– front
– rear
Around the steering wheel
Arrival time
Arrival time, see Computer
"Arrow display", navigation
"AS ADDRESS", navigation
,
"AS DEST.", BMW Assist
Ashtrays
– front
– rear
Assist, see BMW Assist
Assistance systems, see
Driving stability control systems
Assistance window
AUC Automatic Air
Recirculation
Control
,
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Audio
– controls
– switching on/off
– tone settings
– volume
"AUDIO", DVD changer
Audio device, external
Audio mode
Audio source selection
Automatic
– air distribution
– air volume
,
– channel memory
– cruise control
– driving lights control
– luggage compartment lid actuation
,
– memorising of stations
– service notification
– steering wheel adjustment, see Easy entry/exit
"automatic", see Selecting
TMC stations
Automatic air conditioning
– adjusting temperature
– AUTO program
,
– defrosting windows and removing mist
– maximum cooling
– rear air conditioning system
– rear cool box
– residual heat
– settings on control display
,
,
– switching cooling function on and off manually
– switching on and off
,
Automatic Air Recirculation
Control AUC
Automatic closing of doors and luggage compartment lid, see Soft Close
Automatic
Automatic-dim mirrors
Automatic Hold
– activating/deactivating
– parking
– programmable button
Automatic lights
– see Automatic driving lights control
– see Daytime driving lights
– see Headlight courtesy delay feature
– see High-beam headlights assistant
– see Interior light
Automatic station search
,
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– buttons on steering wheel
– interlock
– manual release and application of the transmission interlock
– shiftlock
– towing away
– tow-starting
"AUTO P"
– activating/deactivating
Automatic Hold
– programmable button
AUTO program, automatic air conditioning
– adjusting intensity
"AUTOSTORE", DAB tuner
"Autostore list", radio
,
"AUX", external audio device
"Aux. heating", automatic air conditioning
Auxiliary heater
– activating switch-on time
– preselecting switch-on time
– remote control
– switching on and off directly
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Auxiliary heater, see Parking heater
AUX-IN
– port
AUX-In
– see External audio device
Average fuel consumption
– adjusting units
Average speed
– adjusting units
"Avoid ferries", navigation
Avoiding false alarms
Avoiding motorways, see
Altering route criteria
"Avoid motorway", navigation
"Avoid route", navigation
"Avoid sect.", navigation
"Avoid tolls", navigation
Axle load limits, see
Weights
"A-Z", telephone
B
"Balance", balance and fader
"Band III", DAB tuner
Bar, see Towbar
Bass, see Tone settings
"Bass", treble and bass
Battery
– start help
– switch
Battery change
– remote control with convenient access
"BC", computer
Belts, see Seat belts
Belt tensioner
– see Airbags
– see Seat belts
Biodiesel, see Diesel engine
Blind, see Roller sun blinds
Blower, see
– Air volume
"BLUETOOTH"
Bluetooth link
– activating/deactivating
BMW Assist
– "BMW Assist"
– "BMW Online"
,
– "BMW Service"
– "Breakdown Service"
– "Customer Service"
– "Info Service"
BMW homepage
BMW Maintenance
System
BMW Night Vision
– activating/deactivating
– adjusting settings
– cleaning camera
BMW Online
Boot, see Luggage compartment
Bottle holder, see Drinks holders
Brake assist
Brake discs, see Corrosion of brake discs
Brake light, adaptive, see
Two-stage brake lights
Brake lights
– bulb changing
– two-stage brake lights
Brakes
– ABS
– parking brake
– running in
– two-stage brake lights
Brake system
– BMW Maintenance
System
– running in
– see Safe braking
Breakdown Service, see
Mobile Service
"Brightness"
– BMW Night Vision
– control display
– television TV
Bulb changing, see Lights and bulbs
"button", programmable buttons
Buttons
– next to the controller
– on the steering wheel
C
"Calculate", see Avoiding sections of route
Calculating distance to destination
Call
– accepting
– DTMF suffix dialling
"CALL",
BMW Assist
,
Calling up traffic information manually
Calls
– answering automatically, see
Hands-free unit
– missed, see Dialling a phone number stored in a list
Can holder, see Drinks holders
Capacity, luggage compartment
"Car"
– menus on control display
Car
– battery
– care, see booklet Looking after your car
– dimensions
– laying up out of use, see booklet Looking after your car
– loads
– stopping
– weight
Caravan-towing, see Towing a trailer
Car care, see booklet Looking after your car
Care, see booklet Looking after your car
Car key, see Remote control/ keys
Car radio, see Radio
Carrying children in safety
Car vacuum cleaner, connecting, see Power socket
Car wash
– see booklet Looking after your car
– with convenient access
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system
"Categories",
BMW Assist
CBC Cornering Brake
Control
CBS Condition Based
Service
"CD", CD player
"CDC", CD changer
CD changer
– compressed audio files
– controls
– fast forward, reverse
– installed position
– random play
– sampling
– selecting a track
– selecting CD
– starting
– tone settings
– volume
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player
– controls
– fast forward, reverse
– random play
– sampling
– selecting track
– starting
– tone settings
– volume
Central locking
– convenient access
– from the interior
Central locking system
Centre armrest
– front
– rear
Centre console, see Comfort/ convenience
"CHANGE", navigation
Changing a wheel
Changing batteries
– remote control for independent functions
Changing bulbs
Changing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs
Changing the route
Channels
– memorising for TV
– see TV
Check Control
– "CHECK"
– CHECK button
Child restraint systems
Child safety catches
Child seats, see Fitting child restraint systems
Chrome parts, care, see booklet Looking after your car
Cigarette lighter
Cigarette lighter socket, see
Power socket
Cleaning the headlamps
– tank volume, see Filler neck for washer fluid
Clearance warning, see Park
Distance Control PDC
"Climate"
– activating switch-on time of independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
– preselecting switch-on time of independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
– rear air conditioning system
– rear cool box
– switching independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater on and off directly
Climatic comfort windscreen
Clock
– 12/24-hour mode
– adjusting
– form of expression
– see also Assistance window
"Clock", settings
Closing
– from inside
Closing assistance
– doors, see Soft Close
Automatic
– luggage compartment lid, see Soft Close
Automatic
Coat hooks
Cold starts, see Starting the engine
"Colour", television TV
"Comfort", Electronic
Damping Control EDC
Comfort/convenience functions
Comfort program, Electronic
Damping Control EDC
Comfort seat
– at rear
"Communication", telephone
Compact Disc
– see CD changer
– see CD player
Compressed audio files, CD changer
Computer
– altering units of measurement and forms of expression
– displays on the control display
Computer, see iDrive
Condensate, see When vehicle is parked
Condition Based Service
CBS
Condition of tyres
Configuring settings, see Key
Memory
"CONFIRM", dates for vehicle inspections
"Confirm tyre pressure", Run
Flat Indicator
Congestion
– avoiding with dynamic route guidance switched off
– avoiding with dynamic route guidance switched on
– see Avoiding sections of route
Consumption, see
– Average fuel consumption
Consumption display, see
– Average fuel consumption
– Displays on the info display
– Energy control/current consumption
Consumption display, see
Fuel gauge
Consumption statistics, see
Average fuel consumption
"Continue destination guidance?", navigation
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
"Contrast"
– BMW Night Vision
– television TV
Control centre, see iDrive
Control display
– adjusting brightness
– rear screen
– see iDrive
Control display settings, altering
Controller
– programmable button
– rear screen
– see iDrive
Controls and displays
,
Convenient access
– changing the battery
– observing in a car wash
Convenient operation of windows and glass roof
Coolant
– level
Coolant temperature
Cool box at rear
Cooling
– maximum
– see AUTO program
– see Rear air conditioning system
– see Rear cool box
– see Switching cooling function on and off manually
,
Cooling effect of rear air conditioning system, adjusting
Copyright
Cornering Brake Control
CBC
Cornering lights, see Adaptive
Head Light
"Cornering mode", BMW
Night Vision
"Country", navigation
Country selection
Creating voice-activated address book
Cross-hairs for navigation, see
Selecting destination from map
Cruise control
,
Cruise control, see
– Active Cruise Control
– Programmable cruise control
Cup holder, see Drinks holders
Current consumption, see
Energy control
Current location
– displaying
– saving
"Current stations", radio
D
"DAB", DAB tuner
DAB tuner
– changing stations
– displaying additional information
– manual station selection
– sampling stations
– updating ensembles
Data
– dimensions
– filling capacities
– weights
Date, see Assistance window
– adjusting
– form of expression
"Date", setting
Daytime driving lights
Deadlocking, vehicle
– from inside
– from outside
Defrosting windows
Defrosting windows, see
Defrosting windows and removing mist
Defrosting windows and removing mist
Defrosting windscreen, see
Defrosting windows and removing mist
,
Defrost setting, see
Defrosting windows
,
"DELETE", navigation
"DELETE", telephone
Deleting address book
Deleting entire list, see
Deleting entries in lists
Deleting entries in lists
Demisting windows
Desired speeds, memorising, see Programmable cruise control
Destination, saving by voice input
Destination address entering
Destination for navigation
– manual input
– selecting by voice input
– selecting from map
– selecting via information
Destinations list for navigation system
– deleting
"Dest. input", navigation
"Dest. list", navigation
"Detour", navigation
Deviation route, see Changing the route
Dialled numbers, see
Redialling
Diesel fuel, see Diesel engine
Diesel particulate filter
Digital clock
Digital radio, see DAB tuner
Dimensions
Dipped headlights, automatic
Direction instructions, see
Route guidance by spoken instructions
Direction instructions, see
Spoken instructions
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Directory, see
– Address book
– Phone book
"Dir. of travel", navigation
"Dir. to north", navigation
Display, see
– Info display
Display, see iDrive
Displaying additional information, DAB tuner
Displaying information about the track, CD changer
Displaying map view
Displaying roaming, see
Status lines
Display lighting, see
Instrument lighting
Display lighting, see
Instrument panel lighting
Disposal
– battery for remote control
– car battery
Distance control, see Active
Cruise Control
Distance recorder – odometer
Distance to destination
– units of measurement
Divided screen view, see
Assistance window
Door entry lights, see Interior light
Door key, see Remote control/ keys
Door locks
Downhill gradients
Draught-free ventilation
Drawbar load, see Trailer nose weight
Drinks holders
Driving area
Driving hints
Driving lights, see Side lights/ low-beam headlights
Driving lights control, automatic
Driving on left
Driving stability control systems
Dry air, see Cooling function
,
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
– indicator light
"DTC"
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
– indicator light
DTMF suffix dialling
Dust caps on tyre valves, see
After fitting
"DVD", DVD changer
DVD changer
– adjusting picture
– adjusting volume
– calling up a specific menu
– chapter search
– controls
– country codes
– DVD control
– fast forward
– playing a DVD
– reverse
– selecting language
– selecting picture format
– selecting subtitles
– starting
– stills
– tone settings
DVD multimedia changer, see
DVD changer
Dynamic Drive
"Dynamic route", navigation
Dynamic route guidance, see
Traffic information during route guidance
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
DTC
– indicator light
– indicator light
Dynamic Traction Control
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
E
Easy entry/exit
– seat back width
EBV Electronic Brake Force
Distribution
Economical driving, see
Energy control
"EDC"
EDC Electronic Damping
Control
Eject button, see Buttons on
CD/MD player
Electric
– rear seat backs
– steering wheel adjustment
– window lifts
Electrical fault
– door lock
– driver's door
– fuel filler flap
– glass roof, electric
– luggage compartment lid
– parking brake
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution
Electronic Damping Control
EDC
Electronic Stabilisation
Program ESP, see Dynamic
Stability Control DSC
E-mails, calling up, see BMW
Online
Emergency call
Emergency operation, see
Manual operation
– door lock
– driver's door
– fuel filler flap
– glass roof
– luggage compartment lid
– parking brake
– transmission interlock on automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Emergency Service, see
Mobile Service
"Empty cache", BMW
Online
Energy control
Engaging transmission positions
Engine
– overheated, see Coolant temperature
– running in
– speed
– starting
– stopping
Engine compartment
Engine compartment lid
Engine coolant
Engine oil
– additives, see Approved engine oils
– alternative oils
– approved oils
– checking oil level
– electronic oil level check
– oil grades, see also
Approved engine oils
– possible displays for oil level check
"Engine oil level OK"
"Engine oil level too high"
Ensembles, updating, DAB tuner
"Enter", navigation
Entering house number or junction, navigation
Entering switch-on time for independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
Entering town/city, destination town/city
"Entertainment", tone settings
Entire list, deleting, see
Deleting entries in lists
Environment-conscious driving, see Energy control
ESP Electronic Stabilisation
Program, see Dynamic
Stability Control DSC
Exhaust system, see Hot exhaust system
Extended traffic information, see Traffic Information
Plus
External audio device
"Extra"
– rear air conditioning system
– rear cool box
Eyes
– for lashing, see Securing the load
– for tow-starting and towing away
Eyewear compartment
F
"Fader", balance and fader
Failure message, see Check
Control
Failure of an electrical consumer, see Fuses
False alarms, avoiding
Fastening seat belts
"Fastest route", navigation
Fast forward
– DVD changer
Fault
– door lock
– fuel filler flap
– glass roof
– luggage compartment lid
Fault displays, see Check
Control
Fault messages, see Check
Control
Filling capacities
Filter, see Microfilter and activated charcoal filter
Final drive, running in, see
Engine and final drive
"Fine tuning", automatic air conditioning
First aid pouch
"Fixed programs", automatic air conditioning
Flashing turn indicators
– bulb changing
– indicator light
Flat tyre
– run-flat tyres
– see Changing a wheel
"Flat Tyre Monitor", Run Flat
Indicator
Floor coverings, carpets, see booklet Looking after your car
Fluid reservoir for washer systems, see Filler neck for washer fluid
"FM", radio
FM, see Radio
Fog lights
Footbrake, see Safe braking
Footwell lights, see Interior light
For energy consciousness when driving, see Energy control/current fuel consumption
Forward
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
Fresh air nozzles, see
Ventilation
Front airbags
Front fog lights
– indicator light
Front-passenger airbags, deactivating
Frost protection
– coolant
– washer fluid
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Fuel
– additives
– average consumption
– gauge
– grade
– reserve, see Fuel gauge
– see Average fuel consumption
– see Fuel grade
– tank capacity
Fuel filler flap
– releasing manually
Fuel level
"Full", rear screen
"FULL MENU", DVD changer
"Full screen", BMW Night
Vision
Fuses
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated universal remote control
Gear indicator, see Displays on the info display
Gearshift lever, automatic transmission with
Steptronic
"General destination", navigation
General driving hints
Glass roof, electric
– convenient operation
– manual operation
Glove box
Gradients, trailer towing
Grilles, see Ventilation
Gross weight, see
Weights
Ground lights, see Interior light
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake
– Automatic Hold
– manual operation
Hand lamp
Hands-free microphone, see
Hands-free unit
Hands-free unit
Hazard warning flashers
Head-level airbags
Headlight courtesy delay feature
Headlight flasher
– indicator light
Headlights
– adjustment, see Rule of the road
– bulb changing
– care, see booklet Looking after your car
– cleaning, see Wiper system
Headphones
Head restraints
– front head restraint, active
– safe seated position
Head restraints, installing
– front
Head restraints, removing
– front seats
Heated
– mirrors
– seats
Heated rear window
Heated steering wheel
Heating
– auxiliary heater
– during a stop, see Residual heat
– outside mirrors
– rear window
,
– residual heat
,
– seats
– steering wheel
– windscreen, see Defrosting windows and removing mist
,
– windscreen washer jets
– with car stationary
Heating and ventilation
Heavy loads, see Loading
Height, see Dimensions
Height adjustment
– seat
– steering wheel
"Help"
– assistance window
– menu guidance
Help text on the control display
"Help texts", assistance window
"Hide icons", navigation
"high", automatic air conditioning
,
High-beam headlights
– headlight flasher
– indicator light
High-beam headlights assistant
Hints, navigation system, see
Route guidance by spoken instructions
Hints for driving, see Driving hints
Holder
– for mobile phone, see Using the snap-in adapter
Holder for drinks
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Home address
– saving
– selecting
Horn
Hotel function, see Locking separately
Hot exhaust system
"House number", navigation
Hydraulic brake assist, see
Brake assist
I
ID3 tag, see Displaying information about the track
iDrive
– assistance window
– automatic air conditioning
– automatic air conditioning with extended range of features
– brightness adjustment
– changing date and time
– changing language
– changing settings
– changing units of measurement and form of expression
– confirming a selection or input
– controller
– controls
– displaying help text
– displays, menus
– menus
– rear screen
– selecting a menu item
– start menu
– status lines
– symbols
Ignition key
Ignition lock
Ignition switched on/off
Illuminated make-up mirror
Imitation leather, see booklet
Imprint
Independent air conditioning
Independent functions, remote control
Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
– activating switch-on time
– preselecting switch-on time
– remote control
– switching on and off directly
"Indep. ventil.", automatic air conditioning
Indicator and warning lights
– airbags
– alarm system
– DSC
– DTC
– fasten seat belts
– fog lights
– Run Flat Indicator
Indicators, see Flashing turn indicators
Individually programmable buttons
,
Individual settings, see Key
Memory
Inflation pressures, see Tyre pressures
Info display
"Information", navigation
Information, navigation
– "On country"
– "On destin."
– "On location"
– "On town/city"
"Info Service", BMW
Assist
Infrared-reflecting windscreen, see Climatic comfort windscreen
"INITIALISE",
BMW Assist
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Initialising, TeleService or
BMW Assist
Input for location and destination, see Entering a destination manually
Inside mirror
– automatic-dim
Installed position
– CD changer
– DVD changer
– mobile phone, see Installing mobile phone
– navigation disc drive
Instrument cluster, see Info display
Instrument lighting
Instrument panel, see Driving area
– around the steering wheel
– comfort/convenience functions
Instrument panel, see Info display
Instrument panel lighting, see
Instrument lighting
Integrated universal remote control
Interchanging front and rear wheels
Interior light
– switching on with the remote control
Interior movement detector
– switching off
Interior temperature, adjusting
,
Interlock, see Stopping the engine
"INTERM. TIME", stopwatch
Internet-based services, see
BMW Online
Intervals display, see Service requirements
ISOFIX child seat mountings
J
Jack, see What you need
Jacking point
– for jack, see Jacking up the car
Jacking points, see Jacking up the car
Journey computer
Joystick, see iDrive
Jump-starting, see Starting with a flat battery
Junction, entering for navigation
K
Kerb weight, see Weights
Key
– key-specific settings, see
Key Memory
Keyless-go, see Convenient access
Keyless locking and unlocking, see Convenient access
Key Memory
Keys
– adapter for spare key
Kick-down
Knock control
L
Language, setting on the control display
"Language", settings
Lashings, see Loads
Lashings, see Securing the load
"Last", telephone
"Last destin.", navigation
Last destinations used, see
Destinations list
"Last exit", navigation
Last numbers for mobile phone, see Dialling a phone number stored in a list
Laying up car out of use, see booklet Looking after your car
"L-Band", DAB tuner
LEDs light-emitting diodes
"Left", heated seats
Length, see Dimensions
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs
Lighter
Lighting
– instruments
– vehicle
Lights, see Side lights/lowbeam headlights
– see High-beam headlights assistant
Lights and bulbs
Light switch
"Limit"
Limit, see Speed limit
"Limited", rear screen
Loads
– car
– securing
– trailer
Loads, securing, see
Loads
"LOC.", navigation
"Location", navigation
,
Lockable wheel studs, see
Thiefproof wheel studs
Locking
– from inside
– from outside
Locking without a remote control, see Convenient access
Locking without key, see
Convenient access
"LOGIC7", tone settings
Longlife oils
– alternative oils
– approved oils
Long wave LW, see Radio
"low", automatic air conditioning
,
Low-beam headlights
– automatic
– bulb changing, see Xenon headlights
Luggage compartment
– capacity
– convenient access
– locking separately
– net
– opening/closing, see
Luggage compartment lid
– opening from inside
– opening from outside
– opening with remote control
– see Luggage compartment lid
Luggage compartment lid
– automatic operation
,
– convenient access
– deadlocking separately
– emergency operation, see
Manual operation
– emergency release device
– opening from inside
– opening from outside
– opening separately
– opening with remote control
– remote control
– unlocking manually, see
Opening separately
Luggage rack, see Roof rack
Luggage securing, see
Securing the load
Lumbar support, see
Adjusting lumbar support
LW, see Radio
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
M
M+S tyres, see Winter tyres
Maintenance
– see Service Booklet
– see Service requirements
Maintenance system
Make-up mirror, illuminated
Making a call
– from the phone book
– from the Top 8 list
– redialling
– via the retractable telephone keypad
Manual operation
– door lock
– driver's door
– fuel filler flap
– glass roof
– luggage compartment lid
– of transmission interlock on automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– parking brake
Manual release and application of the transmission interlock
Manual station search
Manual station selection, DAB tuner
Map CD, see Navigation CD/
DVD
Map for navigation
– changing scale
,
– destination input
Master key, see Remote control/keys
Maximum cooling effect
"MD", MD player
MD mode, see MD player
MD player
– controls
– fast forward, reverse
– random play
– sampling
– selecting track
– starting
– tone settings
– volume
"medium", automatic air conditioning
,
Medium wave MW, see
Radio
"Memo", hours signal
"MEMORISE", radio
"Memorised stations", radio
Memory, see
– Key Memory
– Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory
"MENU", DVD changer
"menu", rear screen
"Menu name"
Menus, control display
"Messages",
BMW Assist
,
Microfilter, automatic air conditioning
Microphone for voice input
MiniDisc, see MD player
Mirror
– memory, see Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory
Mirrors
– folding in and out
– heating
– parking position
"Missed", telephone
Missed calls, see Dialling a phone number stored in a list
Mobile phone
– hands-free unit
– initial operation
– inserting
– inserting telephone rest
– logging off from the vehicle
– logging onto the vehicle
– making an emergency call
– missed calls
– operating via retractable telephone keypad
– operation via buttons on steering wheel
– overview
– phone book
– redialling
– removing
– removing telephone rest
– see Overview of the telephone
– selecting from Top 8 list
– snap-in adapter
– switching between mobile phone and hands-free unit
– switching from hands-free unit to mobile phone
– switching from mobile phone to hands-free unit
– volume control
Mobile Service
Modifications, technical, see
For your own safety
"Monitor", adjusting brightness
Monitor, see iDrive
MP3, see Compressed audio files
Multifunction lever
– see Flashing turn indicators/ headlight flasher
– see Wiper system
Multifunction steering wheel, see Buttons on steering wheel
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Music track search
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
MW, see Radio
"My Info", BMW Assist
N
Name, entering as destination for navigation
"Name", navigation
"Navigation"
,
Navigation announcements, see Switching spoken instructions on/off
Navigation CD/DVD, inserting
Navigation disc drive, installed position
Navigation system
– address book
– adjusting volume
– changing the route
– current location
– destination input
– destinations list
– displaying route
– ending/continuing route guidance
– last destinations
– manual input of destination address
– navigation CD/DVD
– route guidance in the assistance window
– route list
– selecting destination from map
– selecting route criteria
– selecting the destination via information
– spoken instructions
– starting route guidance
– switching off, see Ending/ resuming route guidance
"Nav. info", programmable buttons
"Nearest dealer", BMW
Assist
Neck restraints, see Head restraints
Nets, see Securing the load
"New dest.", navigation
,
"New information",
BMW Assist
New remote control
– for vehicle
New remote control for independent functions
"New route", navigation
,
New wheels and tyres
"Next", navigation
Night Vision, see BMW Night
Vision
Night vision unit, see BMW
Night Vision
"No measurement currently possible", check engine oil level
"None", rear screen
Non-smoker package, see
Power socket
North, direction of, in map view
Nose weight
Notepad in voice input system
Nozzles, see Ventilation
Nylon rope, see Towing away and tow-starting
O
OBD socket
Octane numbers, see Fuel grade
Oil
– additives, see Approved engine oils
– alternative oil grades
– approved engine oils
– consumption, see Checking engine oil level
– level
– topping up, see Adding engine oil
Oil change intervals, see
Service requirements
Oil consumption, see
Checking engine oil level
"Oil level at minimum: Add
1 litre engine oil", check engine oil level
"Oil level under min.: Add
1 litre engine oil", check engine oil level
"OK", DVD changer
Old batteries, see
Disposal
"ON / OFF", speed limit
"On-board data"
,
"On country", navigation
"On destin.", navigation
Online help, see Breakdown recovery
Online portal, see BMW
Online
"On location", navigation
"On town/city", navigation
Opening and closing
– from inside
– from outside
– via the door lock
– via the remote control
Orientation menu, see Calling up start menu
Outlets, see Ventilation
Outside air, see Automatic Air
Recirculation Control AUC/ recirculated-air mode
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Outside mirrors
– adjusting
– automatic-dim
– automatic heating
– folding in and out
– passenger-side mirror tiltdown
– towing a trailer
Outside temperature display
– changing units of measurement
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature
Overview
– around the steering wheel
– comfort/convenience
– iDrive
– radio operation
P
"PAIRING", telephone
Panic mode
Park Distance Control PDC
Parking aid, see Park Distance
Control PDC
Parking assistant, see Park
Distance Control PDC
Parking brake
– Automatic Hold
Parking lights
Parking lock, see Parking
Parking position
Parking with Automatic
Hold
Particulate filter, see Diesel particulate filter
Parts and accessories, see
Your individual vehicle
Passenger-side mirror tiltdown
"Pause BMW Online"
PDC Park Distance Control
"PDC pic."
Pen tray, see Storage compartment in centre console
Permitted gross weight
– while towing a trailer
"Perspective", navigation
Petrol
– fuel grade
– gauge, see Fuel gauge
"Phone"
Phone book
– deleting an entry
– dialling entry
– displaying entry
– on the control display
– via iDrive
Phone book, see Voiceactivated phone book
– creating a new entry
– deleting an entry
– deleting entirely
– dialling an entry
– reading out an entry
Phone number
– deleting an individual entry
– dialling from the phone book
– dialling via retractable telephone keypad
– redialling
– Top 8 list
"Picture"
– DVD changer
– television TV
"Picture form", DVD changer
Plasters, see First aid pouch
Plastic, see booklet Looking after your car
Pollen, see Microfilter and activated charcoal filter
Position, see
– Displaying current location
– Saving the car's location
Power failure
Power socket
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Preheating, see Diesel engine
Preheating, see Independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
Pressure, tyres
Pressure monitoring, see Run
Flat Indicator
Pressure monitoring, tyres, see Run Flat Indicator
Programmable
– buttons
– cruise control
Protective function
– glass roof, electric
– window lifts
"Public buildings, Businesses and shops", navigation
Punctures
– Run Flat Indicator
– run-flat tyres
– spare wheel
R
Radiator, see Coolant
Radio
– autostore
– choice of receivable stations
– controls
– memorising stations
– sampling stations
– selecting waveband
– switching on/off
– tone settings
– traffic reports
– volume
Radio Data System RDS
Radio readiness
– with convenient access
Radio-signal key, see Remote control/keys
Rain sensor
Raising and dipping automatically, see Highbeam headlights assistant
Random play of music tracks
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
Range
Rape seed methyl ester
RME
"RDS", radio
RDS Radio Data System
Reading lights
"Rear", rear screen
"Rear air condition.", rear air conditioning system
Rear air conditioning system
– adjusting cooling effect
– rear cool box
– switching on/off
– switching on/off via iDrive
Rear armrest, see Rear centre armrest
"Rear cool box"
Rear cool box
Rear fog lights
– bulb changing
– indicator light
Rear lights
– bulb changing
Rear lock, rear screen
Rear screen
Rear seat backs, electric, see
Adjusting Comfort seat at the rear
Rear seats
– adjusting
– adjusting head restraints
– adjustment of front passenger's seat from rear
– heating
Rear seats, electric
Rear TV, see Television
TV
Rear window blind, see Roller sun blinds
Reception
– DAB tuner, see Changing stations
– radio, see Changing stations
– radio, see Updating choice of receivable stations
– TV, see Updating display of receivable channels
Rechargeable hand lamp
"Recirc. air", programmable buttons
Recirculated-air mode, automatic air conditioning
Recirculation of air, see
Recirculated-air mode
,
Reclining seat, see Adjusting seat
Recycling
Redialling list, see Dialling phone number from phone book or from a list
Reflecting tail lights, see Rear lights
Refuelling
Regional programmes
"REG off", radio
Rejecting
– call
"Release", rear screen
Releasing
– engine compartment lid
Remaining distance
– for service requirement
Remaining distance to destination
– faults
Remote control
– changing the battery
– convenient access
– garage door opener
– luggage compartment lid
Remote control for auxiliary heater/independent ventilation control
Remote control for independent functions
– changing batteries
– new remote control
Removing head restraints
– front
Replacement fuses
Replacement key, see New remote controls
Replacing tyres
"REPLY", BMW Assist
Reserve, fuel, see Fuel gauge
"RESET", tone settings
"Reset connection data",
BMW Online
Resetting the tone settings
Residual distance
– see Range
Residual heat
,
Restraint systems
– for children
– see Seat belts
Returning end-of-life vehicles, see Recycling
Reverse
– CD changer
– CD player
– DVD changer
– MD player
Reverse, automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Reversing lights, bulb changing
Revolution counter
Rhombic button
"Right", heated seats
RME rape seed methyl ester
"RND"
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
Road map
"Roads closed"
– BMW Assist
– traffic information
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
"Roadworks"
– BMW Assist
– traffic information
RON, see Fuel grade
Roof load
Roof rack
Rope, see Towing methods
Rotary/pushbutton control, see iDrive
Route
– altering criteria
– avoiding sections
– displaying arrow view
– displaying map view
– displaying streets or towns/ cities
– displays
– selecting
Route, see Displaying route
Route guidance
– altering route specifications
– continuing
– displaying route
– distance and arrival time
– ending
– selecting a new route
– starting
– volume of spoken instructions
Route guidance by spoken instructions
"ROUTE GUIDE", navigation
,
"Route guide", navigation
Route instructions, see Route guidance by spoken instructions
"Route select", navigation
RSC Runflat System
Component, see Run-flat tyres
Rule of the road
Run Flat Indicator
– initialising the system
– snow chains
– system limits
– warning light
Runflat System Component
RSC, see Run-flat tyres
Run-flat tyres
– flat tyre
– new tyres
– replacing tyres
– tyre pressure
– winter tyres
Running in
S
Safe braking
Safe seated position
– with airbags
– with head restraints
– with seat belt
Safety lock buttons on doors, see Locking
Safety switch for rear windows
Safety systems, see
– Airbags
– Driving stability control systems
– Seat belts
Safety tyres, see Run-flat tyres
Sampling, Scan
– CD changer
– CD player
– DAB tuner
– MD player
– radio
Sampling music tracks, Scan
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
Saving current location
Saving numbers, see Phone book
Scale, changing, map view for navigation
"SCAN"
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
– radio
,
Scan, sampling
– CD changer
– CD player
– DAB tuner
– MD player
– radio
Screen, see
– iDrive
– Rear screen
Screw thread for towing eye
Search track
– CD changer
– CD player
– MD player
Seat back contour, see
Adjusting lumbar support
Seat backs, see Adjusting seat
Seat back width adjustment, see Adjusting Comfort seat at the front
Seat belts
– care, see booklet Looking after your car
– safe seated position
– warning light
Seats
– adjusting
– at the rear
– automatic seat back width adjustment
– Comfort seat
– heating
– lumbar support
– memory, see Seat, mirror and steering wheel position memory
– position memory
– shoulder support
– thigh support
– ventilation, see Active seat ventilation
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
"Seat temp.", heated seats
Seat ventilation, see Active seat ventilation
Sections of route, altering
Security
Selecting
– menu items in iDrive
– route for navigation
Selecting a menu
Selecting country
Selecting frequency band,
DAB tuner
Selecting functions, see iDrive
Selecting TMC stations
Selector lever, automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Selector lever interlock, see
Engaging transmission positions
Self-levelling suspension
Service, see Mobile
Service
Service Booklet
Service car, see Mobile
Service
Service requirements
"Services", BMW Assist
"Service Status", BMW
Assist
"SET", DAB tuner
"SET", setting and altering speed limit
"Set time 1", independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
"Set time 2", independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
"Settings"
– activating/deactivating
Bluetooth link
– logging mobile phone onto the vehicle
Settings
– assistance window
– BMW Night Vision
– date and time
– entertainment
– Key Memory
– language
– units of measurement
Side lights
Ski bag
Socket
– doors
Sliding/tilt sunroof, see Glass roof, electric
Snow chains
Ignition lock
Smokers' package, see
Ashtray
Snap-in adapter
– for On-Board Diagnosis
– for remote control, see
Soft Close Automatic
– luggage compartment lid
Soot particle filter, see Diesel particulate filter
Setting time, see Preselecting switch-on time
Shifting, see Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Shiftlock, see Engaging transmission positions
Short commands for the voice input system
"Shortest route", navigation
"Short info", programmable buttons
Short wave SW, see
Radio
Side airbags
Side flashing turn indicators, changing bulb
Side lights/low-beam headlights
Side window blinds, see Roller sun blinds
Signal horn, see Horn
SOS, see Making an emergency call
Sound output for entertainment systems, switching on/off
Spare fuses
Spare key
– adapter
Spare wheel
Special oils, see Approved engine oils
Specified oil grades, see
Approved engine oils
Speed
– average
– limit
– when towing a trailer
Speed-dependent volume control
Speed limit
– with winter tyres
Speedometer
"Speed Vol.", speeddependent volume control
"Split"
– assistance window for onboard data
– navigation, see Display in the assistance window
Spoken instructions for navigation system
– muting
– repeating
– switching on/off
– volume control
Spoken notes
Sport program
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– Electronic Damping Control
EDC
"Sports", Electronic Damping
Control EDC
Stability control, see Driving stability control systems
"Standard settings", BMW
Online
Star button
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
"START", BMW Assist
"START / RESET", journey computer
Start/stop button
Starting and stopping, TV
Starting difficulties
– starting with a flat battery
Starting the engine
Starting with a flat battery
Station
– see Radio
"Stationary", independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater
Stations
– memorising for radio
"§ Stat. periodic insp."
"Status",
BMW Assist
Status at time of printing
Status lines
– in assistance window
Steering wheel
– adjustment
– buttons on steering wheel
– easy entry/exit
– heating
– memory
– programmable button
– with multifunction buttons
Steptronic, see Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
"STOP", journey computer
Stopping
– car
– engine
Stopwatch
– starting and stopping
– taking interim time reading
Storage, tyres
Storage compartment
– see Centre armrest, front
– see Centre armrest, rear
Storage compartments
Storage space, see Luggage compartment
Straps, see Securing the load
Street, entering for navigation
"Street", navigation
"SUBTITLE", DVD changer
Summer tyres, see Wheels and tyres
Sun blinds, see Roller sun blinds
"SVS active", voice input system
SW, see Radio
Switch
– for battery
Switches
– around the steering wheel
– comfort/convenience
Switching cooling function on/ off manually
,
Switching on
– CD changer
– CD player
– DVD changer
– MD player
– TV
Switching on/off
– audio
– radio
Switching on hour signal
Switch-on time of independent ventilation control/auxiliary heater, entering
– "Switch. time 1"
– "Switch. time 2"
Symbols
– indicator and warning lights
– navigation system
T
Tachometer, see
Speedometer
Tailgate
– see Luggage compartment lid
Tail lights, see Rear lights
Tank capacity
– see also Filling capacities
Technical data
Technical modifications, see
For your own safety
Telematics, see TeleService,
BMW Assist
Telephone
– accepting calls
– see Overview of the telephone
Telephone book
– deleting completely
Telephone keypad, retractable
Telephone preparation, see
Mobile phone provision
Telephoning
– conditions
TeleService
– initialising
– services available
Television TV
Temperature
– adjusting on automatic air conditioning
– altering units of measurement
– outside temperature warning
– see Hot exhaust system
Temperature display
– interior temperature
– outside temperature
– setting units of measurement
Temperature distribution, heated seats
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Temperature of coolant, see
Coolant temperature
"Terminate BMW Online"
Theft protection
– for wheel studs, see
Thiefproof wheel studs
The right tyres
Thigh support, see Adjusting seat
Third brake light, see Rear and brake lights
Three-point seat belt
Through-loading system
Tightening torque of wheel studs, see After fitting
Tilt alarm sensor, switching off
"Time", setting
Time display adjustment
Timekeeping, see
Stopwatch
Timer, see Preselecting switch-on time
"TITLE", DVD changer
"TMC station", traffic information
Tolls, avoiding for navigation
Tone
– adjusting
– resetting the settings
"Tone", tone settings
Tone for audio mode, adjustment, see Tone settings
Toolkit
"TOP", DVD changer
"Top 8", telephone
Top 8 for telephone
– deleting entire list
– dialling phone number
Top speed
– with trailer
– with winter tyres
Torch, see Rechargeable hand lamp
Torque
– wheel studs, see After fitting
Touchtone for telephone, see
DTMF suffix dialling
Towing a trailer
,
Towing away
– towing eyes
Towing eye
"Town/city", navigation
"Town/PC", navigation
Tow-starting
"TP"
– programmable buttons
– radio
TP function
Track width, see
Dimensions
Traction aid, see DSC
"Traffic"
– BMW Assist
– traffic information
"Traffic info",
BMW Assist
Traffic information
– during route guidance
– in the map view
– selecting TMC stations
– switching transmission on/ off
– Traffic Information Plus
Traffic reports
– displays and signals
– selecting TMC station
– switching on/off
– TP function
– volume
"Traff.info Plus",
BMW Assist
Trailer towing
– towing loads and gross weight
– trailer tow hitch
Trailer towing, see Towing a trailer
Transmission, see Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transporting children
Transport securing equipment, see Securing the load
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Trap protection
– glass roof, electric
– window lifts
"Travel info", navigation
Tray for pens
Tread depth, see Minimum tread depth
"Treble", treble and bass
Treble and bass
Trip distance recorder
Triple turn signal
"TUNE", radio
,
Turning circle, see
Dimensions
TV
– adjusting picture
– Autostore
– changing channels
– changing format
– controls
– starting
– starting and stopping
– tone settings
– volume
"TV", television TV
Two-stage brake lights
Tyre changing
– changing a wheel
– replacing tyres
Tyre pressures
– for trailer towing
– pressure loss, see Indication of a flat tyre
Tyres
– age
– changing
– condition
– damage
– pressure monitoring, see
Run Flat Indicator
– pressures
– punctures
– replacing
– run-flat
– running in
– storage
– tread
– winter tyres
U
Units
– average speed
"Units", changing settings
Units of measurement
– average fuel consumption
– distance
– fuel consumption
– temperature
Units of measurement on control display, altering
Universal remote control, see
Integrated universal remote control
Unlocking
– from inside
– from outside
– luggage compartment lid
,
Unlocking and locking doors
– from inside
– from outside
Unlocking without key, see
Convenient access
"UPDATE", BMW Assist
"Update of engine oil level in process"
"Using motorway", navigation
V
Vacuum cleaner, connecting, see Power socket
Vanity mirror, see Illuminated make-up mirror
"Vehicle"
– BMW Assist
Vehicle
– position, see Current location
– return, see Recycling
– running in
– Vehicle Identification
Number
266
Vehicle battery, see Car battery
Vehicle recycling, see
Recycling
Ventilating, see
– Rear-seat area ventilation
Ventilation
– draught-free
Ventilation, see
– Independent ventilation
Ventilation for rear
VHF, see Radio
Video, see DVD changer
"View", navigation
Viscosity
Voice-activated phone book
Voice input system
– short commands
Volume adjustment
– spoken instructions
– voice input system
Volume control
– speed-dependent adjustment
– telephone ring tone
– traffic reports
Volume distribution, see
Balance and fader
W
Wading
Warning and indicator lights
Warning messages, see
Check Control
Warning triangle
Washer fluid
– filler neck
Washer jets, see Windscreen washer jets
Washer systems, see Filler neck for washer fluid
Waste receptacle, see
– Centre armrest front
– Front ashtray
Water on roads, see
Wading
Waveband
Wear indicators in the tyres, see Minimum tread depth
Weights
Wheel/tyre combination, see
New wheels and tyres
Wheelbase, see
Dimensions
Wheel changing
– spare wheel
– with run-flat tyres
Wheel chock, see What you need
Wheels and tyres
Wheelslip control, see
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
Wheel studs
– see Preparations for changing a wheel
– thiefproof
– tightening torque, see After fitting
– wrench, see What you need
Width, see Dimensions
Window lifts
– convenient operation
,
– safety switch
Windscreen
– cleaning, see Windscreen washer
– defrosting, see Defrosting windows and removing mist
Windscreen, infrared reflecting, see Climatic comfort windscreen
Windscreen washer system
– see Wiper system
– washer fluid
– windscreen washer jets
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Windscreen wiper blades, changing
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system
– care, see booklet Looking after your car
– changing wiper blades
Winter-grade diesel
Winter tyres
– changing
– condition
– run-flat tyres
– speed limit
– tyre storage
Wiper system
"With map", navigation
Wordmatch principle for navigation
Wrench/screwdriver, see
Toolkit
X
Xenon headlights, bulb changing
Y
"YES", navigation
– deleting address book
– deleting destinations individually from the address book
– deleting destinations list
"Your BMW dealer", BMW
Assist
Your individual vehicle
Z
"Zoom", BMW Night Vision
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
More about BMW www.bmw.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
*BL001319700L*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 197 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Advertisement
Key features
- Powerful engine for an exhilarating driving experience
- Exceptional handling and stability for a confident and composed ride
- Luxurious interior for a comfortable and refined journey
- Advanced safety features for peace of mind on every journey